JP2019080865A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine enabling efficient generation of energization force.SOLUTION: Since a coil spring SP1 is positioned close to presentation means 780, energization force can be efficiently generated. Further, a player's visual recognition of the coil spring SP1 can be avoided by a spring cover SC1. It can be prevented that the spring cover SC1 makes symbols and patterns drawn on the exterior of the presentation means 780 invisible. Even if an unexpected posture change occurs in the presentation means 780, when the presentation means 780 is disposed at an ascended position, the spring cover SC1 contacts the presentation means 780 to correct the positional change. Therefore, positional changes can be corrected every time when disposed at the ascended position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a gaming machine provided with a movable part configured to be displaceable, and a biasing unit that generates a biasing force that assists the displacement of the movable part (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-054856, A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of efficiently generating the urging force. The present invention has been made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently generating a biasing force.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a displacement means configured to be displaceable, a guide means configured to be able to guide the displacement of the displacement means, and a biasing means for biasing the displacement means. A game machine having a biasing means, comprising shielding means disposed on the front side of the biasing means and disposed to block at least a part of the line of sight to the biasing means, the biasing means comprising And disposed between the displacement means and the guiding means along a predetermined direction.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the shielding means is disposed on the back side of the displacement means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the shielding means is configured to be capable of entering the inside of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the biasing force can be generated efficiently.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to prevent the shielding means from hiding the displacing means.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, it is possible to prevent the shielding means from hiding the displacing means.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of a left side production unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the left presentation unit in the VIIa-VIIa line of FIG. 6, (b) is sectional drawing of the left presentation unit in the VIIb-VIIb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board in the VIII-VIII line of FIG. It is a front view of a base board. It is sectional drawing of the game machine in the line corresponding to the XX line of FIG. It is a rear view of a right side production unit. It is a disassembled rear view of a right side production unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right side production unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right side production unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation | movement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation left cover part and a rotary body. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotary body and a rotation right cover part. (A) And (b) is a disassembled front perspective view of the compound operation unit of a 1st operation unit. (A) is a front disassembled perspective view of a part of structure of a rotation unit, (b) is a perspective view which shows typically the harness which comprises electrical wiring. (A) is a top view of a guide member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the guide member and the electrical wiring taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a view of FIG. 31 (a) 31D is a cross-sectional view of the guide member and the electric wiring along the line XXXIc-XXXIc, and FIG. 31D is a cross-sectional view of the guide member along the line XXXId-XXXId of FIG. Fig. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the guide member and the electrical wiring taken along the line XXXIe-XXXIe). (A) is a left side view of the combined operation unit, (b) is a front view of the combined operation unit, and (c) is a right side view of the combined operation unit. (A) is a left side view of the combined operation unit, (b) is a front view of the combined operation unit, and (c) is a right side view of the combined operation unit. (A) is a left side view of the combined operation unit, (b) is a front view of the combined operation unit, and (c) is a right side view of the combined operation unit. (A) to (f) is a front view of the third symbol display device and the first operation unit schematically showing the third symbol display device and the first operation unit. (A) And (b) is a left view of a detection sensor and a driven plate of a rotation right cover part. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a fixed base member, a displacement base member, a drive means, a transmission means, and an urging means. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a fixed base member, a displacement base member, a drive means, a transmission means, and an urging means. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a shaft support means and a connection means. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a shaft support means and a connection means. It is an exploded front perspective view of the effect means. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a presentation means. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit in a plane extending horizontally through the columnar fastening portion of the support means. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of a rotation arm member and an end gear. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. FIG. 51 is a partial cross-sectional view of a second operation unit taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 50. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view of a second operation unit taken along line LVI-LVI of FIG. 50. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of a second operation unit taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 51. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along line LVIII-LVIII in FIG. 52. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment in XX of FIG. (A) is a front view of the 2nd operation unit in a 3rd embodiment, (b) is a front perspective view of narrow diameter collar. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right side production unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right side production unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the drawing is the front (front) side, and the rear side of the drawing is the rear (rear) side. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper side (upper side), the lower side is the lower side (lower side), the right side is the right side (right side), and the left side is the left side Each side will be described. Further, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, as well as a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill (not shown). , 62, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached on the back side (or front side) of 1).

  The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes (see, for example, FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw etc. from the front side of 13. The base plate 60 may be made of a light transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened during the definite variation or time is short, and the number of times the motorized symbol 640a is opened per one operation does not change, and the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The middle and bottom three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the probability variation or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized symbol 640a per hit, or the like during definite variation or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which the ball is likely to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the balls fired to the game board 13 is configured to pass through. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be two, for example.

  Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side or the lower side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric role part 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the electric winning combination 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning combination 640a. Aim the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-hand"), and get a lot of chances for a big hit lottery by winning in the first winning opening 64, the big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim to become a player.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is shot so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the through gate 67 is passed to open the electric role part 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning in the second winning opening 640 as well as in the state.

  It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handed” is also possible by “left-handed”. It is also possible to aim at the winning opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (permanent change, in time, during normal, during normal). It can be unnecessary to change "right-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the troublesomeness which changes how to hit a ball can be eliminated.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the "right-handed" is configured not to aim at the first winning opening 64, and the ball fired in "left-handed" does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (permanent change, in time, during normal, during normal). Can be required to change between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding game characteristics that change how the ball is hit.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed to the right of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning combination opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning combination opening 64, For example, the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, the left side or the right side of the variable display unit 80, or the upper side may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-ports 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the second winning port 640.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening and closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large open port solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving the electric part 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. .

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441, 541, 731 and an electromagnetic solenoid 2086d.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. In addition, in description of FIG. 5, FIG. 2 is referred suitably.

  As described above, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, as well as a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill (not shown), as well as rails 61 and 62 , General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, variable display device unit 80, can be fitted from the front side to the window 60a opened in the base plate 60 On the base plate 60, there are provided a center frame 86 configured in the following shape, a left rendering unit 150 disposed at the lower left of the center frame 86 and capable of guiding a ball to the general winning opening 63, and a variable winning device 65. The right effect unit 160 configured to be fittable from the front side to the small window portion 60b to be opened, and a ball flow down unit (not shown) configured to allow the ball discharged from the game area to flow down are assembled. The Made is, the peripheral portion is attached to the rear surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The center frame 86, the left rendering unit 150 and the right rendering unit 160 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. .

  The base plate 60 is formed of wood plywood laminated with plywood, and various structures are disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side except for the open portions such as the window portion 60a and the small window portion 60b. Shielding is configured to prevent the player from visually recognizing the body.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the left rendering unit 150 is a unit formed of a light transmitting resin material, is disposed along the front of the base plate 60, and has a plate shape having a width equal to that of the inner rail 61. And a lower plate portion 152 extending downward from the left end of the upper plate portion 151 and having a width equal to that of the upper plate portion 151, and a rear portion of the lower plate portion 152. An opposing plate portion 153 formed in a flat plate shape connected to the end portion and the rear end portion of the upper plate portion 151 and disposed to face the front surface of the base plate 60 in a surface contact state, and the front surface side of the opposing plate portion 153 And a bottomed semi-cylindrical ball guide member 154 having a bottom on the front side and opened upward, and the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 at the lower position of the ball guide member 154 And a plurality of ridges 155 formed in the shape of ridges directed upward from the Obtain.

  An opening is not formed in the base plate 60 except for an opening corresponding to the general winning opening 63 at a location opposite to the left rendering unit 150. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement (deformation) of the opposing plate portion 153 by utilizing the rigidity of the base plate 60. Therefore, regardless of the thickness of the opposing plate portion 153, the sphere on the front side of the opposing plate portion 153 The flow can be stabilized.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the opposing plate portion 153 deviates from the ball guiding member 154, and a ball which is determined not to win in the general winning opening 63 (and the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640) flows down. It is disposed on the back side of the route. Thereby, the influence which the opposing plate part 153 gives to the flow-down mode of the ball which may enter the winning opening 63, 64, 640 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, while the base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member, the front side is from the irradiation device (for example, the LED member 544 of the rotation unit 500, see FIG. 25) disposed on the back side of the base plate 60. It is possible to show the player the light emitted toward the user through the opening corresponding to the general winning opening 63. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the light-emitting effect in which only the ball guiding member 154 disposed corresponding to the general winning opening 63 is made to emit light without the peripheral opposing plate portion 153, the upper plate portion 151 and the like being made to emit light.

  That is, for example, even if the distance between the light emitting means and the ball guide member 154 is large, the light is squeezed by the opening formed in the base plate 60 at the position corresponding to the general winning opening 63. It is possible to execute a light emission effect that causes only the guide member 154 to emit light. Therefore, even if a dedicated light emitting means for making the ball guiding member 154 emit light is not provided, the light irradiated from the LED member 544 (see FIG. 25) of the rotation unit 500 described later is located at the position corresponding to the general winning opening 63. By causing the ball guide member 154 to emit light, it is possible to execute an emission effect by causing the ball guide member 154 to emit light.

  As a result, it is possible to easily make a point (for example, the general winning opening 63) at which a player can make a profit by reaching the ball in the game area. Hereinafter, the details of the left rendering unit 150 will be described.

  FIG. 6 is a front view of the left rendering unit 150. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the protruding portion 155 is a portion protrudingly formed in a protruding shape from the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 in the front-rear direction, and a first protruding portion disposed on the more upstream side It has a portion 156 and a second projection 157 disposed downstream of the first projection 156. Although the shapes (protruding form) are different between the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157, the basic idea is the same, so the details of the shape of the first protrusion 156 will be described. About the strip part 157, the difference with the 1st protrusion part 156 is demonstrated, and description about a detail is abbreviate | omitted.

  The first ridge portion 156 is configured such that four ridges of substantially the same shape are arranged in a step-like manner. Since the ridges are formed in substantially the same shape in the front-rear direction, they can be in contact with the ball without depending on the front-back position of the ball, and the decelerating action of the ball can be generated.

  Each protrusion is respectively arrange | positioned by each range which divides the range of the downward perpendicular | vertical downward direction of the ball | bowl guide member 154 into 4 equally by the left-right direction. That is, since the vertically lower range of the ball guide member 154 is formed with a left and right width of about 16 [mm], each protrusion is formed with a left and right width of about 4 [mm].

  Each protrusion is configured such that the dimension in the vertical direction is gradually shortened toward the downstream side. The difference in the vertical length is generated by adjusting the vertical length of the right side portion 156c of the protrusion. Therefore, the upper side portion 156a and the curved portion 156b of the ridges have the same shape in each ridge. The details of the upper side portion 156a, the curved portion 156b, and the right side portion 156c will be described later.

  As described above, since the difference between the vertical lengths of the ridges is caused by adjusting the vertical length of the right side portion 156c of the ridges, the first ridges 156 have the same step width. On the other hand, the upper and lower dimensions of each step are formed in a step-like shape which becomes smaller toward the lower side.

  In particular, the difference between the upper and lower dimensions of the left end protrusion and the upper and lower dimensions of the protrusion provided adjacent to the right side is the largest (about 0.35 [mm]), and thereafter, the upper and lower dimensions of the adjacent protrusions The difference in dimensions is about half (about 0.16 to 0.18 [mm]). The upper and lower dimensions of each protrusion will be described later.

  According to this configuration, the deceleration effect on the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the first ridge portion 156 can be maximized in the first ridge (the ridge at the left end) and gradually reduced in the subsequent ridges. . As a result, since moderate loads are applied to the ball at a plurality of points, the ball can be sufficiently decelerated without locally causing overload (stress concentration). In addition, it is easier to make the deceleration effect correspond to the velocity change (velocity reduction) of the ball rolling on the first ridge portion 156 as compared to the case where the deceleration effect is unchanged at each ridge. Because it can, excessive deceleration can be avoided, and it can be easy to prevent the ball from stopping unintentionally.

  In the second ridge portion 157 described later, the difference between the upper and lower dimensions of adjacent ridges is all equal (equal) (about 0.11 [mm]), and the upper and lower dimensions of the ridge at the left end are It does not adopt a configuration that is dramatically large. The upper and lower dimensions of each protrusion will be described later. The purpose of this is to keep the inclination of the lower plate portion 152 with respect to the horizontal level so that it is unnecessary to decelerate the ball significantly, and to prevent breakage of the second protrusion 157, the details of which will be described later.

  In addition, the outer shape of the game ball B1 contacting the curved portion 156b of the upstream ridge and the upper side portion 156a of the downstream ridge at the position where the upper and lower sides of the adjacent ridges are the smallest is shown by an imaginary line. . As shown in FIG. 6, the center (center of gravity) of the gaming ball B1 is disposed to the right of the right end of the upper side portion 156a.

  The arrangement of the game balls in contact at the same two points by changing the abutting ridges is such that the upper and lower dimensions of the projecting ridges become larger as the abutting ridges become upstream ridges, The gaming ball is to be disposed further to the right, and naturally, the center (center of gravity) of the gaming ball B1 is disposed to the right of the right end of the upper side portion 156a.

  Therefore, when the game ball B1 is disposed in a state of being held between the adjacent ridges, the game ball's own weight is directed to roll on the plurality of ridges toward the downstream side, so It is possible to avoid stopping in a state of being sandwiched between the lines.

  The detail of the structure of each protrusion with which the 1st protrusion 156 is provided is demonstrated. Each protrusion has an upper side portion 156a extending downward and inclined to the horizontal direction from the left end portion, a curved portion 156b continuously formed from the right end portion of the upper side portion 156a, and a lower right end portion of the curved portion 156b And a right side portion 156c extending downward along the vertical direction.

  The upper side portion 156a is formed as a flat portion which is inclined downward with respect to the horizontal direction in a front view and extends in a planar manner back and forth, so it is easy to prevent the ball rolling on the upper surface unintentionally stopping can do. The length of the upper side portion 156a in a front view is 3.15 [mm], the inclination angle of the upper side portion 156a with respect to the horizontal direction is approximately 7 degrees, and the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is approximately 35 degrees.

  The curved portion 156b is a curved surface configured in a curved shape having a radius of about 1 mm in a front view, and has a role of assisting rolling of a ball. That is, since the contact between the ball and the ridge can be continued and the rolling state can be easily maintained as compared with the case where the curved portion 156b is configured as a corner, the effect of decelerating the ball is maintained. be able to.

  The lower side portion 156c is designed to have a length of about 1.42 [mm], about 1.58 [mm], about 1.76 [mm], about 2.11 [mm] in this order from the downstream side. Thus, the upper and lower dimensions of each ridge are designed to be about 2.80 [mm], about 2.96 [mm], about 3.14 [mm], about 3.49 [mm] in order from the downstream side. Ru.

  The lower side portion 156 c is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction in a front view and extending in a planar manner in the front and back direction, so that it is possible to prevent the ball from being displaced against the inclination of the lower plate portion 152. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the ball which is about to be displaced in the direction away from the out port 71 (see FIG. 2) toward the out port 71.

  The angle of the lower side portion 156c with respect to the horizontal direction is approximately 90 degrees, and the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is approximately 56 degrees. Thus, the inclination angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 of the protrusion is configured such that the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 on the downstream side is larger than the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 on the upstream side.

  As a result, for the ball reaching the ridge from the upstream side, the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface is made small to cause a small decelerating action that does not stop, while the ball reaching the ridge from the downstream side On the other hand, by increasing the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface, the speed of the ball heading upstream can be effectively reduced, and the ball can easily flow downstream.

  The second projection 157 is configured such that the vertical width of each projection is shorter than that of the first projection 156, and this difference makes the length of the right side portion 156c of the second projection 157 different. It is caused by Therefore, the shape of the upper side portion 156a, the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction (that is, about 7 degrees), the shape of the curved portion 156b, and the like are configured in the same manner for each protrusion.

  On the other hand, the lower plate portion 152 is formed in a curved shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is disposed on the upper right side, and compared with the inclination angle (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction) near the first ridge portion 156 Since the inclination angle (the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction) near the second protrusion 157 is smaller, the angle between each protrusion of the second protrusion 157 and the lower plate 152 is the first protrusion Different from that described above for unit 156.

  That is, the length in a front view of the upper side portion 156a of the second protrusion 157 is 3.15 [mm], the angle to the lower plate portion 152 of the upper side portion 156a is about 19 degrees, and the lower side of the right side portion 156c is The angle with respect to the plate portion 152 is about 70 degrees. Thus, the inclination angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 of the protrusion is higher than the numerical value described above as the first protrusion 156, compared with the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 on the upstream side. The angle with respect to the portion 152 is configured to be larger.

  As a result, the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface is reduced with respect to the ball reaching the ridge from the upstream side more than that described above as the first ridge portion 156, and a small decelerating action that does not stop For balls that reach the ridge from the downstream side, by increasing the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface, the speed of the ball heading upstream is effectively reduced, and the balls are downstream. It can be made to flow easily.

  The lower side portion 156c of the second ridge portion 157 has a length of about 0.16 [mm], about 0.27 [mm], about 0.38 [mm], about 0.49 [mm] sequentially from the downstream side Is designed. Thus, the upper and lower dimensions of each ridge are designed to be about 1.54 [mm], about 1.65 [mm], about 1.76 [mm], about 1.87 [mm] in this order from the downstream side. Ru.

  In addition to the fact that the upper and lower dimensions of each step are shorter than the respective projections of the first projection 156, each projection of the second projection 157 has a difference in the upper and lower dimensions of the adjacent projections. Are all equal (equal difference (about 0.11 [mm])). That is, since the configuration that the upper and lower dimensions of the left end protrusion are dramatically large is not adopted, the deceleration ratio of the balls rolling on the upper surface can be made uniform, and measures are taken against the fragility of the left end. Thus, the durability of the second protrusion can be improved.

  The left rendering unit 150 includes a diffusing portion 158 in which a diffusing shape capable of diffusing light is formed on the front end surface of the upper plate portion 151 and the lower plate portion 152. The diffusion unit 158 plays a linear light by diffusing the light reaching the left rendering unit 150 from the front side through the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) or the light reaching from the top, bottom, left, right or back side. It can be shown to the person and can improve the rendering effect.

  Since the diffusion portion 158 is also formed on the front end surface of the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157, the diffusion portion 158 can be partially widened. Thereby, the width of the light visually recognized by the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 is visually recognized at the periphery thereof (a portion where neither the first ridge portion 156 nor the second ridge portion 157 is formed) It can be made larger than the width of the light being emitted.

  In addition, the maximum width of light visually recognized by the diffusion portion 158 on the front side of the first ridge portion 156 is made larger than the maximum width of light visually recognized by the diffusion portion 158 on the front side of the second ridge portion 157 be able to. If it explains in full detail, according to the upper and lower dimension of each projection mentioned above, the width of the light recognized by diffusion part 158 can be changed in steps, and the upper and lower among the projections in the 2nd projection 157 Among the ridges in the first ridge 156, the ridge with the smallest vertical dimension is larger in the vertical dimension than the ridge with the largest dimension, so the diffusion portion 158 on the front side of the first ridge 156 The width of the light visually recognized by the above can be made larger than the width of the light visually recognized by the diffusion portion 158 on the front side of the second protrusion 157.

  As a result, the degree of attention of the player looking at the left rendering unit 150 can be made different for each range. That is, the degree of attention of the second protrusion 157 is higher than the degree of attention of a portion which is neither the first protrusion 156 nor the second protrusion 157, and the second protrusion 157 has a higher degree of attention than the second protrusion 157. The degree of attention of the protrusion portion 156 can be made higher.

  A ball guiding member 154 disposed corresponding to the general winning opening 63 is disposed above the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157 where the degree of attention is increased. Since the basic gaming posture of the player is a posture to look down on the general winning opening 63 and the ball guiding member 154 disposed on the front side, the player is placed below the ball guiding member 154 in the view. There is a high possibility that the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157 will enter.

  Then, by raising the degree of attention of the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157 (by irradiating light), the player can easily grasp the left and right positions of the general winning opening 63. As a result, the general winning opening 63 and the ball guiding member 154 disposed on the front side can be easily noticed.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the degree of attention of the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157 without directly illuminating the general winning opening 63 or the ball guiding member 154 or adorning it. By increasing the value of (1), the attentional power of the general winning opening 63 and the ball guiding member 154 can be improved (emphasized).

  Also, the width of light visually recognized by the diffusion portion 158 is configured to change depending on the upper and lower dimensions of each protrusion, but the upper and lower dimensions of the protrusion at the left end of the first protrusion 156 are significantly large. Because of the configuration, it is possible to exert an effect of attracting the player's gaze strongly. Thereby, the attention power of the ridge at the left end of the first ridge portion 156 can be improved as the most upstream position where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the upper plate portion 151 lands.

  Further, the width of the light visually recognized by the diffusion portion 158 is configured to be changed depending on the upper and lower dimensions of each ridge, so the width of the light is gradually reduced toward the downstream side (right side) Ru. Thereby, the light gradually tapering down toward the downstream of the game area can be viewed through the diffusion section 158, so that the trajectory of the ball can be shown by the light, or the outer edge of the game area is different in thickness By decorating with light (light that tapers), it is possible to produce an effect as a light-emitting effect, such as being able to form a sharp appearance.

  In FIG. 6, downflow paths L1 and L2 are illustrated as main examples of the downflow path of a ball. The flow-down path L1 is a path through which the ball reaching the upper plate portion 151 falls after falling from the right end of the upper plate portion 151, and the ball flowed down in the flow-down path L1 is downstream of the first ridge portion 156 It reaches the upper surface of the plate portion 152 (landing).

  The flow-down path L2 is a path through which the ball flowing on the nail (not shown) and flowing down to the right without flowing to the upper plate portion 151 flows down between the pair of ball guiding members 154. The ball that has flowed down in the flow-down path L2 reaches (lands) the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 on the upstream side of the second ridge portion 157.

  As described above, the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157 are formed in a range different from the range in which the balls flowing down in the flow-down paths L1 and L2 of the balls reach (land) the lower plate portion 152 Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the impact at the time of arrival (landing) of the ball is given to the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157.

  In addition, since the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157 are disposed on the downstream side of the reach (landing) range of the ball, the ball that has flowed down in the flow paths L1 and L2 is It can be decelerated before reaching it. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid that the part disposed in the path to the out port 71 is damaged by the load (impact) received from the ball.

  When the ball rolling on the lower plate portion 152 starts to abut on the first ridge portion 156, the repulsive force applied to the ball from the first ridge portion 156 is not on the side where the ball reaches but on the right side. It is possible to avoid stopping the ball. On the other hand, since the direction of the repulsive force depends on the shape of each ridge, the direction of the repulsion is largely different depending on the side on which the ball reaches.

  For example, when the ball reaches the first ridge portion 156 from the upstream side (left side) (abutment start), the repulsive force is generated in a direction perpendicular to the upper side portion 156a, so the load F1 substantially upward Become. On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first ridge portion 156 from the downstream side (right side) (abutment start), the direction of the repulsive force is not in contact with the right side portion 156c and is perpendicular to the curved portion 156b. Although it occurs in the direction, it is a load F2 that is almost rightward.

  Therefore, the velocity change in the left and right direction can be gently generated for a ball arriving from the upstream side, and the velocity change in the left and right direction is vigorously generated for a ball arriving from the downstream side (the velocity Can be reversed).

  The ball may bounce back to the left by colliding with another ball arranged near the out port 71 or colliding with a component arranged on the front side of the out port 71. The ball is less likely to reach the first protrusion 156, but is less likely to reach the second protrusion 157 near the out port 71.

  Therefore, although formed on the lower side of the ball guide member 154, the second protrusion 157 is provided at a position deviated from the landing position of the ball flowing down in the flow-down paths L1 and L2, it rebounds due to the above-mentioned circumstances Since the ball may collide with the second protrusion 157, if the second protrusion 157 is fragile, there is a possibility that the second protrusion 157 may be damaged by the impact of the ball collision. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in each protrusion provided in the second protrusion 157, the difference between the upper and lower dimensions of the adjacent protrusions is configured equally (equal difference), and the upper and lower dimensions of the left end protrusion Has not adopted a configuration that is dramatically large. Thereby, compared with the case where it is made to sharpen a specific protrusion excessively, the 2nd protrusion part 157 can be comprised so that it is hard to damage.

  In addition, since each protrusion is formed in a projecting shape from the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 in the front-rear direction, the second protrusion is compared with the case where it is provided protruding in a corner (two) shape The portion 157 can be configured to be resistant to breakage.

  FIG. 7A is a cross-sectional view of the left rendering unit 150 along the line VIIa-VIIa in FIG. 6, and FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view of the left rendering unit 150 along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b), the thickness of the first protrusion 156 and the thickness of the second protrusion 157 are configured to be equal, and a recess having a depth corresponding to the opposite side of the protrusion is provided. A groove is formed. By making the thickness equal, it is possible to maintain high molding accuracy of the left rendering unit 150 formed of a resin material.

  As described above, while the thicknesses of the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157 are formed to be equal, the diffusion portion 158 is configured to cover the recessed groove from the front side. It overhangs below the 2nd projected part 157, and is formed. That is, the diffusion portion 158 is formed to have a width that is equal to or greater than the thickness of the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157.

  As described above, since the upper and lower dimensions of each projection are longer in the first projection 156 than in the second projection 157, the first projection 156 is also the second projection in the concave groove. Deeper than part 157. Corresponding to this, the width dimension (maximum value) of the diffusion portion 158 is such that the diffusion portion 158 disposed on the front side of the first projection 156 is on the front side of the second projection 157 It is longer than the diffusion part 158 provided.

  Thus, the width of the diffusion portion 158 can be expanded regardless of the thickness of the first projection 156 and the second projection 157. Therefore, the width of light to be viewed through the diffusion portion 158 can be expanded. Can.

  This makes it possible to improve the power of attention to the diffusion portion 158 and the first projection 156 and the second projection 157 connected to the upper end of the diffusion portion 158, and the first projection 156 and the first projection 156 The presence or absence of the ball entering the general winning opening 63 can be grasped by viewing the direction toward the projecting portion 157. This is explained below.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the line of sight YE1 of a player who plays a game often follows a line (radial line) going outward of the game area as it goes to the back side. Therefore, the player's line of sight YE1 looking at the projecting portion 155 corresponding to the lower edge portion of the game area is a direction view in which it is inclined downward toward the back side.

  A player who looks in the direction of the line of sight YE1 can see not only the ridges 155 crossing the line of sight YE1 but also the light reflected by the ridges 155. That is, reflected light R1 which is incident on the ridge portion 155 through the opposing plate portion 153 and reflected along the line of sight YE1 can be viewed through the ridge portion 155.

  The reflected light R1 travels downward through the ball guiding member 154, is incident (reflected) on the counter plate portion 153, and travels so as to be incident (reflected) on the ridge portion 155. That is, the light source of the reflected light R1 is disposed above the ball guiding member 154, and the facing plate portion 153 serves as a reflecting means (for example, a mirror), whereby the reflected light R1 reaches the ridge portion 155. .

  Thus, the reflected light R1 is light passing through the passage path of the ball to the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 5), which is the ball guide member 154. Therefore, when looking at the ridge portion 155 with the line of sight YE1, a ball appears on the ridge portion 155, or the light is blocked by the ball, so that the ridge portion 155 looks dark. Thereby, the player can grasp the presence or absence of the ball entering the general winning hole 63 through the change of the reflected light R1. Therefore, the player can be made to grasp information having profit efficiently while reducing the fatigue of the player. This is explained below.

  Conventionally, in the game when the gaming state is normal, the player often moves the line of sight around the general winning opening 63 and the inner rail 61. This is to obtain information useful for the game from the flow-down state of the ball in the game area.

  First, since the winning balls (five to fifteen balls in the present embodiment) are paid out when a ball enters the general winning opening 63, the higher the frequency of entering the general winning opening 63, the more games are played It can be judged that the ball holding of the pachinko machine 10 is good. Second, it can be determined that, as the frequency of arrival of the ball near the inner rail 61 is higher, the pachinko machine 10 in the game has a higher frequency of discharging the ball from the out port 71. At first glance, it seems that the pachinko machine 10 is more profitable for the player as the frequency of arrival of the ball near the inner rail 61 is lower, but it is not so limited.

  These pieces of information are incomplete just by grasping individually, and need to be comprehensively grasped. For example, it is not known that the pachinko machine 10 is profitable for the player because the frequency of arrival of the ball near the inner rail 61 is low.

  Even in this case, if the frequency of entering the general winning opening 63 is excessively high, the frequency of entering the first winning opening 64 will be low, so the frequency of the jackpot lottery of the pachinko machine 10 during the game Is considered low. Therefore, since it can be expected that it will take a long time to win the jackpot, there is a high possibility that the player having a short playable time will not go to the game (a possibility that it can not be said to be profitable for the player) high).

  From this point of view, it is necessary for the player to move the line of sight at the general winning opening 63 and the vicinity of the inner rail 61 to obtain information at each point. However, if the number of times the eye gaze is moved is large, the player's fatigue increases, which tends to lead to a decline in the motivation for the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to obtain information at a plurality of places without moving the line of sight. That is, even if the line of sight is not moved from the line of sight YE1 looking at the projected ridge portion 155, it is possible to grasp the arrival frequency of the ball near the inner rail 61 and the ball entering frequency to the general winning opening 63. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and prevent the player's motivation for the game from being diminished, and to make the player efficiently grasp information having a profit.

  In addition, since the presence or absence of the ball entering the general winning opening 63 can be grasped if the mode of the reflected light R1 changes, the degree of reflection of light through the opposing plate portion 153 is not limited at all, and various modes are available. I will illustrate. For example, the shape may be emboss processing and the light reflection efficiency may be low, or the mirror surface processing may be performed, or another member (seal member or mirror-like member) having a mirror surface may be provided to improve light reflection efficiency. You may raise it.

  Moreover, the angle of the plate front of the opposing plate part 153 and the plate front of the base plate 60 is not limited at all, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, they may be parallel, or the plate front of the opposing plate portion 153 may be configured as an inclined surface. Thereby, it can respond suitably to the position of the light source of reflected light R1.

  FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line VIII-VIII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the ball reaching (landing) on the lower plate portion 152 flows downward through the flowing path L3 toward the lower side of the game area.

  The balls flowing down in the flow-down path L3 reach the front side of the out port 71 while hitting the glass unit 16 (front side) and the base plate 60 (back side), and then are discharged from the game area through the out port 71.

  When the force of the ball is strong, there is a possibility that the ball jumping to the right from the lower end portion of the lower plate portion 152 may collide with the movable role 640 a. When the movable part 640a is broken due to the collision, it is difficult to continue normal gaming, so it is desirable to avoid the ball colliding with the movable part 640a.

  Further, the front design member FD1 formed of a light transmitting resin is disposed on the front side of the movable part 640a, and the movable part 640a is covered by the front design member FD1, so the movable part 640a is movable. It is hard to notice the presence or absence of damage. Also from this point, it is required to prevent breakage of the movable part 640a in advance, and it is desirable to avoid that the ball collides with the movable part 640a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protruding portion 155 is provided in the flow-down path L3, and the ball jumping out from the lower end portion of the lower plate portion 152 reaches the movable part 640a by decelerating the ball. The momentum of the ball has dropped to less than the momentum needed to Thereby, breakage of the movable part 640 a can be prevented in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the protruding portion 155 is disposed at a position included in the lateral width of the ball guide member 154 in top view. In detail, the ball guide member 154 has a total of the left and right widths of the passage path of the ball and the left and right widths of the pair of fastening portions disposed on the left and right of the ball guide member 154. ] It is comprised so that it may become above.

  Thereby, the ball | bowl guide member 154 can be utilized as a protection member of the projection part 155. FIG. That is, since the ball guiding member 154 interferes with the falling path of the ball when the ball falls toward the protruding portion 155, the falling path of the ball can be changed and the ball The collision (landing) of the part 155 can be easily avoided (the frequency can be reduced).

  Therefore, the contact between the ball and the ridge portion 155 can be easily limited to the contact with the ball which flows down (rolls) after landing on the lower plate portion 152. It is possible to prevent the portion 155 from being broken or broken, and it is possible to maintain the deceleration effect of the ball by the protruding portion 155 for a long time.

  As described above, the center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view, and the window 60a is adjusted to the size of the center frame 86. Although the opening is formed, the present embodiment is characterized in the shape of the window 60 a with respect to the shape of the center frame 86. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, a line indicating the shape of the center frame 86 in a state of being assembled to the base plate 60 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

  That is, the center frame 86 is a member formed of a light transmitting resin material, and is a flat plate portion 86a disposed opposite to the base plate 60 from the front side and having a through hole through which a fastening screw passes. On the front side of the flat plate 86a, the boundary wall 86b extending in a wall shape on the front side of the flat plate 86a and forming the boundary of the gaming area, and at the approximate middle position between the inner rail 61 and the lower left of the boundary wall 86b Where a divergent plate 86c is provided in a plate shape and provided parallel to the adjacent boundary wall 86b (see FIG. 5) (see FIG. 9), in FIG. 9, the outer edge shape and the inner edge shape of the flat plate 86a and the boundary wall The shape of 86b and the shape of the diverting plate portion 86c are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the window portion of the base plate 60 in the range where the boundary wall 86 b constitutes the rolling surface (the lower surface) of the ball (the range in which the normal passing through the outer surface of the boundary wall faces upward). 60a is provided in a range extending to the outside of the boundary wall 86b in a front view. Therefore, light can pass through the window 60a not only on the inner side of the boundary wall 86b (on the center side of the window 60a) but also on the outer side of the boundary wall 86b.

  Thus, the light passing through the window 60a can be applied to the ball rolling on the upper surface of the boundary wall 86b, and a light-emitting effect that makes the ball glow can be performed. Here, the upper surface of the boundary wall 86b is a spot that is likely to be a blind spot for a player who plays a game while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is easy to become a difficult place, but the mode of light passing through the window 60a changes depending on whether there is a ball or not, so the player can easily grasp whether or not there is a ball by checking the mode of light. can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the efficiency of the area for performing effects is achieved by using this dead angle, which will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine 13 taken along a line corresponding to line X-X in FIG. FIG. 10 shows an example of the arrangement of the eyes of the player when playing the third symbol display device 81 from the front. In the arrangement of the eye shown in FIG. 10, the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the line of sight YE2 in the front-rear direction, while the boundary wall 86b disposed above the center frame 86 looks up It will be visually recognized in the line of sight YE3.

  When viewing the game area with the line of sight YE3, at least a part of the field of view is shielded by the boundary wall 86b and the decorative portion disposed on the inner side (lower side) thereof, and the shielded area shielded by the boundary wall 86b and the decorative portion It becomes difficult to see SE1 (it becomes a blind spot). In the present embodiment, the base plate 60 is intentionally opened at a position overlapping with the shielded range SE1 in the front-rear direction, and the window portion 60a is provided. In other words, by not treating the shielded area SE1 as a pattern or a portion where a figure is drawn, effective use of the blind area is attempted. This is explained below.

  Conventionally, when the base plate 60 is made of a wooden member, a seal on which a pattern or a figure is drawn (printed) is attached mainly to the range on the back side of the game area to create individuality of each game machine The decoration method was adopted.

  In this case, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize a pattern or a figure even in a range which is likely to be a blind spot in the vicinity of the wall-like portion extending to the game area side like the boundary wall 86b and the decoration part. It is difficult to increase the effect.

  There is also an option of not sticking a seal in the range which is likely to become a blind spot, and thereby the material cost of the seal can be reduced by reducing the area of the seal, but the line of sight of the player is not always fixed. Therefore, if the line of sight changes and the exposed portion of the base plate 60 (the wooden board member) is not attached because the seal is not attached, it gives the player the impression of being cheap and is motivated to play It may cause decline. Therefore, it is hard to say that the option of not sticking a decorative seal in a range which is likely to be a blind spot is not preferable, and an improvement has been desired.

  In addition, when completing a pattern or figure in a range out of the blind spot, it is necessary to draw a pattern or figure in a range in which the size of the game area, which is limited in size, is further narrowed. It was difficult to increase the degree of freedom.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the window portion 60a in the base plate 60 in a range overlapping with at least a part of the shielded range SE1, the shielded range SE1 is not a place drawing a figure or a pattern, It is adopted as a light path. That is, according to the present embodiment, the transmitted light R2 which is emitted from the rendering means (for example, the supported means 760, see FIG. 37) disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 and travels to the front side It can be configured to transmit the flat plate portion 86a in SE1.

  As a result, even if the option of not sticking the seal on which the pattern or the figure is drawn is selected in the shielded area SE1, the player who visually recognizes the shielded area SE1 is illuminated by the transmitted light R2. Since the bright flat portion 86a can be shown, it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the player the impression of being cheap, and as a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in the gaming intention.

  In addition, since the line of sight YE3 and the transmitted light R2 overlap, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the transmitted light R2 and the pattern or figure drawn on the seal attached to the base plate 60. . The appearance of the game area viewed with the line of sight YE3 can be changed at least in the irradiation state of the transmitted light R2 and in the non-irradiation state, so that the degree of freedom of decoration of the game area can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the shielded range SE1 as a dead angle can be effectively used, and the degree of freedom of decoration of the game board 13 can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect of the game board 13 can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the boundary wall 86b includes a left boundary wall 86b1 extending from the upper end to the lower left, and a right boundary wall 86b2 extending from the upper end to the lower right. In each of the game areas, visible light passing areas are linearly configured, but have different widths.

  That is, on the right boundary wall 86b2 side, the distance between the outer rail 62 and the outer edge member 73 is narrow, and the path of the sphere is almost constant, so the width for transmitting light is also narrow (about 5 mm or less) . On the other hand, on the left boundary wall 86b1 side, the place where the ball lands varies in firing strength, and it is possible to bounce after landing even if it collides with a nail (not shown) before landing. Because of the change, the path of the ball is unlikely to be constant (variation occurs). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width for transmitting light is configured to be wide (about 12 mm at the maximum) in order to cope with variations in the flow-down path of the sphere.

  In particular, around the diverting plate 86c, the window 60a is extended to a position overlapping both the left and right ranges of the diverting plate 86c, and the light transmitting width is equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere (about 11 [ mm] or more). As a result, the transmitted light R2 can be applied to the spheres flowing down either of the left and right of the diverting plate portion 86c.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the shape of the window 60a is designed so that the transmitted light R2 can be easily applied to the ball rolling on the boundary wall 86b. Transmitted light R2. Therefore, even when the ball flows down a portion which is blocked by the boundary wall 86b and tends to be a blind spot, the appearance of the transmitted light R2 can be changed according to the presence or absence of the sphere, so the presence or absence of the sphere is determined. It is possible to make the player easily grasp.

  An example of the irradiation aspect of transmitted light R2 is demonstrated. For example, when notifying the player to play the game by left hitting, the light is irradiated to the left boundary wall 86b1 side, and when notifying the player to play the game by right hitting to the right boundary wall 86b2 by light It may be controlled to emit light. In this case, by looking at the boundary wall 86b, the player can easily grasp whether the ball should be fired by hitting the left or the ball should be fired by hitting the right.

  Moreover, the irradiation aspect of transmitted light R2 is not limited at all. For example, the irradiation mode which continues lighting may be sufficient, and the irradiation mode which repeats lighting and light extinction (it blinks) may be sufficient.

  Moreover, the irradiation aspect which makes the circumference | surroundings of the diverting board part 86c light is not limited at all. For example, an irradiation mode may be used in which both the left and right sides of the diverting plate portion 86c are illuminated, or an irradiation mode in which either one of the left and right sides of the diverting plate portion 86c may be illuminated.

  For example, when the game area is configured such that most of the cases where the ball flows on the left side of the diverting plate portion 86c when the ball's firing strength becomes weaker than a specific reference, only the left side of the diverting plate portion 86c In the control mode in which the transmitted light R2 is emitted so as to illuminate the player, the player can easily grasp whether the emission intensity of the ball is weaker than a specific reference or not by confirming the brightness of the transmitted light R2. can do.

  That is, when the sphere passes the left side of the diverting plate 86c, the transmitted light R2 is blocked by the sphere and the left side of the diverting plate 86c is visually recognized dark, so the brightness of the transmitted light R2 and the emission intensity of the sphere Can be associated with being weaker than a specific criterion. As a result, it is possible to reduce the stress felt by the player when adjusting (maintaining) the launch intensity of the ball, as compared to the case where the launch intensity of the sphere is grasped by confirming the landing position of the sphere.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by configuring the portion shielded by the boundary wall portion 86 b or the diverting plate portion 86 c to be a dead angle as a passage of the transmitted light R2 traveling from the back side to the front side, It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of light effects in the game area. The range in which the dead angle is formed is not limited to the upper side of the boundary wall 86 b or the left side of the diverting plate 86 c, and various modes are exemplified.

  For example, it may be a range below the pair of plate-like portions extending downward to the left and right of the first winning opening 64, or may be a range outside the inner rail 61 or the outer rail 62 (the opposite side of the game area) Of the ball guiding member 154 (see FIG. 5) for guiding the ball to the general winning opening 63 disposed on the left side of the game area. The lower range may be used, or the lower range of the plate-like portion extending toward the lower right side of the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the right side of the game area may be used. The range may be the range opposite to the third symbol display device 81 in a front view, or may be the range around other plate-like portions protruding toward the front side of the base plate 60.

  Referring back to FIG. The right rendering unit 160 is a unit provided with the variable winning device 65, and is fitted to the small window portion 60b of the base plate 60 from the front side. The ball entering the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2) of the variable winning device 65 flows down the flow-down path FL1 (see FIG. 11) formed on the back side of the right rendering unit 160, and a ball discharge path not shown. You will be guided to.

  FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right side rendering unit 160. As shown in FIG. The right rendering unit 160 has a base member 161 having an open portion opened toward the back side and constituting the front side of the flow-down path FL1 and a first flow path member 162 constituting the back side of the flow-down path FL1. And the second flow path member 163, an adjustment member 165 disposed on the front side of the second flow path member 163 and configured to be able to be fitted with the second flow path member 163, an LED and the like emitting light toward the front side And a plurality of electric decoration boards 168 on which the light emitting means of the present invention are disposed.

  The gaming ball having entered the flow-off path FL1 through the specific winning opening 65a flows down the front side of the first flow path member 162, and then flows down the front side of the second flow path member 163. That is, the first flow path member 162 constitutes the flow-down path FL1 on the upstream side of the second flow path member 163.

  The electric decoration board 168 includes a first electric decoration board 168a disposed on the back side of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device 65, a second electric decoration board 168b disposed on the rear side of the range outside the ball flow path, and The third electric decoration board 168c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the second flow path member 163 and disposed on the back side of the flow-down path FL1.

  In FIG. 11, the outer shape of each LED (light emitting means) is illustrated as a hidden line inside the electric decoration substrate 168. As shown in FIG. 11, the LEDs are not disposed in such a manner that the density is divided depending on the location, and are distributed substantially uniformly on the electric decoration board 168.

  By the first electric decoration board 168a, it is possible to execute a light-emitting effect that illuminates the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 65 or the open portion where the game ball can enter when the opening / closing plate is open. By the second electric decoration board 168b, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that causes the front design portion of the right effect unit 160 to shine regardless of the game balls flowing down into the right effect unit 160.

  By the third electric decoration board 168c, it is possible to execute a light-emitting effect in which the manner of light emission changes in relation to the game balls flowing down the flow-down path FL1. That is, when the gaming ball is disposed in the second flow path member 163, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the shadow generated by the light emitted from the third electric decoration board 168c being blocked by the gaming ball. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is not arranged in the second flow path member 163, the shadow of the gaming ball can be prevented from being visually recognized.

  The light emitted from the third electric decoration board 168c passes through the second flow path member 163, the adjustment member 165, and the base member 161 in order, passes to the front side of the right rendering unit 160, and is visually recognized by the player, As the number of passing members increases, the amount of light to be recognized is easily attenuated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the adjustment member 165 is disposed on the front side of the lower end portion of the second flow path member 163 (the end of the range which is the falling path FL1 and is visible to the player). The portion where the light quantity tends to be attenuated can be limited to the vicinity of the end of the flow-down path FL1. Thereby, the rendering effect by the light irradiated from the third electric decoration board 168c can be improved as compared with the case where the light amount is attenuated at the midway position of the flow-down path FL1.

  Furthermore, while the ball passing through the flow-through path FL1 is visible even in front view, the player usually looks down at the right effect unit 160 disposed at the lower right portion of the game area. Therefore, a straight line connecting the player's line of sight and the third electric decoration board 168c (a straight line inclined obliquely downward as approaching the pachinko machine 10 from the player's eyes) connects the adjustment member 165 and the third electric decoration board 168c. The possibility of crossing a line segment (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction through a part of the adjustment member 165) is low.

  This is an effect obtained by arranging the adjusting member 165 at a position away from the player's eyes (near the lower end position of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 2)), but the light amount is attenuated by the adjusting member 165 It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player pays attention to the range. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the effect of the light visually recognized by the player by the light irradiated from the third electric decoration board 168c is reduced by the adjusting member 165.

  12 is an exploded rear view of the right rendering unit 160, FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rendering unit 160, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rendering unit 160. In FIG. 12, the first flow path member 162 is assembled to the base member 161 to facilitate understanding, and the second flow path member 163 and the adjustment member 165 are illustrated in a disassembled state.

  The base member 161 is a semi-formed portion 161a opened toward the back surface and having the front side surface of the flow-down path FL1 formed therein, and a female thread projecting in a cylindrical shape toward the back surface and formed at the tip A pair of columnar fastening parts 161b into which fastening screws inserted into the member 162 are screwed, and a female projecting longer than the columnar fastening parts 161b and projecting like a column toward the rear side and formed at the tip A specific columnar fastening portion 161c into which a fastening screw inserted into the second flow path member 163 is screwed into a screw, and a plurality of thin plate-like members projecting radially outward on the base end side of the specific columnar fastening portion 161c A protrusion 161 d and a recessed portion 161 e recessed from the back side to the front side of the base member 161 in a range including the specified columnar fastening portion 161 c are provided.

  The plurality of projecting ridges 161d are formed at angular positions corresponding to the notches 165e and the outer diameter recessed part 165g of the adjusting member 165, and by adjusting the notches 165e to the projecting ridges 161d, the adjusting member It is possible to easily adjust the posture at the time of assembly of 165.

  The recessed portion 161e is recessed in a shape corresponding to the plate-like portion 165a of the adjustment member 165 (a shape that is larger by the adjustment width), and functions as a recess for disposing the plate-like portion 165a. In the assembled state in which the plate portion 165a is disposed in the recessed portion 161e (see FIG. 11), the back surface of the plate portion 165a is disposed on the surface on which the back surface of the base member 161 is disposed (in other words, The back surface of the base member 161 and the back surface of the plate-like portion 165a are disposed flush with each other).

  That is, although the adjusting member 165 is a member disposed on the front side of the flow-down path FL1, the difference in arrangement in the recessed portion 161e does not affect the shape of the flow-down path FL1. Therefore, as described later, even when the position of the adjustment member 165 is adjusted by the adjustment width with the recessed portion 161e, it is possible to prevent the shape of the flow-down path FL1 from being changed by the position adjustment. .

  In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the adjustment member 165, if the base member 161, the first flow passage member 162 and the second flow passage member 163 are assembled in the arrangement suitable for causing the ball to flow down, the ball flows down the flow down path FL1. It is configured to be able to flow down. Therefore, as compared with the case where a part of the flow path shape (for example, a half pipe shape) as seen in the semi-formed portions 161a, 162a, 163a is also formed in the adjustment member 165, You can lower the level of difficulty.

  The first flow path member 162 is opened so as to be insertable into a semi-formed portion 162a opened toward the front side and forming the back side surface of the flow-down path FL1 and a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the columnar fastening portion 161b. And a columnar fastening portion 162c in which a fastening screw to be inserted into the second flow path member 163 is screwed into a female screw formed in a tip end on the rear side and having a pair of insertion holes 162b.

  In the second flow path member 163, a semi-formed portion 163a opened toward the front side to form a back side surface of the flow-down path FL1 and a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the columnar fastening portion 162b are pierced. The small diameter cylindrical column projects from the front side end of the half formation part 163a to the front side through the insertion hole 163b, and the insertion hole 163c into which the fastening screw fixedly fixed to the specific columnar fastening part 161c is pierced. And a plurality of fitting projections 163d.

  The adjusting member 165 is a member formed of a light transmitting resin material, and has an outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the recessed portion 161 e and formed in a plate shape having a thickness equal to the recessed depth of the recessed portion 161 e. Plate-like portion 165a, a plurality of fitting holes 165b drilled in the plate-like portion 165a with a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the fitting convex portion 163d at a position corresponding to the fitting convex portion 163d; A chamfered portion 165c chamfered at a corner where the upper surface and the back surface of 165a intersect, a plate portion 165d formed on a deep plate whose front side is opened at the right end of plate portion 165a, and the plate portion 165d Cut from the edge of the plate toward the bottom of the plate and cut in the back and forth direction with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the diameter of the specific columnar fastening portion 161c at the center of the bottom of the plate portion 165d Adjustment to be set Comprising a 165f, and a plurality of outer-diameter portion 165g that is recessed in the adjusting hole 165f toward the outer diameter direction of the adjustment hole 165f.

  The fitting hole 165b is configured to be able to be fitted to the fitting convex portion 163d of the second flow passage member 163 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), and by this fitting, the rigidity of the second flow passage member 163 It can be strengthened.

  More specifically, in the second flow path member 163, the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED disposed in front of the third electric decoration board 168c is viewed by the player in addition to the viewpoint of material cost. For the purpose of facilitating the process (for the purpose of suppressing the attenuation of light), it is desirable to form it thin.

  On the other hand, when the second flow path member 163 is formed to be thin, there is a possibility that the second flow path member 163 may be deformed outward of the flow path by the load applied from the gaming ball flowing down without measures. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by fitting the fitting convex portion 163d of the second flow path member 163 to the fitting hole 165b, it is possible to generate a resistance to a load directed outward of the flow path. . Thereby, the deformation of the second flow path member 163 can be prevented.

  The chamfered portion 165c is a processing portion for avoiding that the corner portion collides with the ball flowing down the flowing down path FL1. Therefore, it is sufficient if it is formed only at the minimum location (for example, the range between the pair of fitting holes 165b) facing the ball flowing down the flow-down path FL1. Processing costs can be reduced.

  Even when the adjusting member 165 protrudes from the recessed portion 161e of the base member 161 to the back side due to a dimensional error or the like, the chamfered portion 165c is formed at the corner facing the ball flowing down the flowing down path FL1. The point of collision between the ball and the adjusting member 165 can be configured by a surface. Thus, the possibility of breakage of the adjusting member 165 can be reduced, and the flow resistance of the ball can be reduced.

  The plate portion 165d is more easily grasped than the plate portion 165a because it protrudes to the rear side, and functions as a handle when removing the adjusting member 165 at the time of assembly or maintenance. At the time of assembly, since the notch 165e is easily guided to the projection 161d by the taper of the notch 165e, the posture adjustment of the adjusting member 165 can be easily performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform an assembling operation for inserting the specific columnar fastening portion 161c into the adjustment hole 165f.

  In a state where the specific columnar fastening portion 161c is inserted into the adjustment hole 165f, the posture of the adjustment member 165 is changed (adjustment is performed with the gap dimension between the notch portion 165e and the outer diameter recessed portion 165g and the protrusion portion 161d as the upper limit) )can do. The mode of adjustment will be described later.

  Here, the purpose of configuring the adjusting member 165 as a variable member will be described. In the present embodiment, both the first flow path member 162 on the upstream side and the second flow path member 163 on the downstream side form the front side shape of the flow-down path FL1 using the back side shape of the base member 161. The number of members constituting the flow-down path FL1 is reduced compared to the case where the other members constituting the front side shape of the flow-down path FL1 are individually prepared for the first flow path member 162 and the second flow path member 163 respectively. can do. This can reduce the material cost.

  On the other hand, in resin molding, dimensional variations occur, so it is not always possible to produce flow path members of exactly the same shape. Depending on how the variation in the dimensions of the flow path member occurs, the ball may not pass through the flow-down path FL1. Therefore, in the actual assembling process, when the first flow path member 162 is fastened and fixed to the base member 161, it is confirmed that the ball passes through the flow-down path FL1, and the first flow path member 162 at a position where the ball can pass. Are fastened and fixed, and then the second flow-down path member 163 is fastened and fixed to the columnar fastening portion 162 c of the first flow path member 162 and the specific columnar fastening portion 161 c of the base member 161.

  Thus, it is preferable that a fixed range of adjustment width be provided at the fixed position of the first flow path member 162 with respect to the base member 161. In the present embodiment, the difference between the inner diameter of the insertion hole 162b and the outer diameter of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 162b can be used as the adjustment width. In addition, since the second flow path member 163 is directly fastened and fixed to the first flow path member 162 in the vicinity of the connection position of the flow-down path FL1 regardless of which adjustment width is used, the shape of the flow-down path FL1 Can be made easy.

  In this case, the influence of the adjustment width of the first flow path member 162 also occurs on the second flow path member 163. As described above, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the second flow path member 163 not only by arranging the second flow path member 163 opposite to the back surface of the base member 161 but also by fitting it. However, when the fitting portion is fixed to the base member 161, the fitting portion on the base member 161 side and the fitting portion on the second flow path member 163 side are affected by the adjustment width of the first flow path member 162. And may be misaligned.

  In consideration of this positional deviation, the fitting portion on the base member 161 side and the fitting portion on the second flow path member 163 side may be fitted with a clearance fit, but the larger the clearance, the second flow path The action of strengthening the rigidity of the member 163 is reduced, which is not preferable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fitting portion on the side of the base member 161 is provided on the adjusting member 165, and the adjusting member 165 can be adjusted in arrangement with an adjusting width exceeding the adjusting width of the first channel member 162. Thus, the positional deviation of the fitting portion caused by the position adjustment of the first flow path member 162 can be offset, and the occurrence of the assembly failure can be avoided.

  In this case, since it is not necessary to sufficiently secure a gap between the fitting hole 165b of the adjustment member 165 and the fitting convex portion 163d of the second flow path member 163, the second gap The rigidity of the two flow path member 163 can be sufficiently enhanced.

  According to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the difference between the dimension of the base member 161 and the dimension of the adjustment member 165 is used as the adjustment width. For example, by setting the width wa1 of the protruding portion 161d of the base member 161 to be shorter than the width wa2 of the outer diameter recessed portion 165g of the adjustment member 165, the adjustment width can be secured (wa1 < wa2).

  Further, for example, the width wb1 of the recessed portion 161e of the base member 161 is longer than the width wb2 of the plate-like portion 165a of the adjustment member 165, whereby the adjustment width can be secured (wb1> wb2).

  Further, in the adjustment member 165, the adjustment hole 165f is supported by the specified columnar fastening portion 161c so as not to come off with the fastening and fixing of the second flow path member 163, and the fitting convex portion 163b is inserted into the fitting hole 165b. The back surface of the second portion 165 a is fixed to the front end of the semi-formed portion 163 a of the second flow path member 163 so as to be fixed between the base member 161 and the second flow path member 163. .

  Therefore, since a dedicated fastener for fastening and fixing the adjusting member 165 can be eliminated, reduction of the product cost and reduction of the number of assembling steps can be achieved.

  Referring back to FIG. The operation unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. Hereinafter, this operation unit 300 will be described.

  15 and 16 are front views of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300. In FIGS. 15 and 17, the movable members (each movable part) of the first operation unit 400 and the second operation unit 700 are arranged in the standby position, and in FIG. 16, the first operation unit A state where each movable member (each movable combination) of 400 and the 2nd operation unit 700 is arranged in the projection position which overhangs the front of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 15, FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in the operation unit 300, movable roles that displace the front side of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction are vertically disposed, and movable vertically disposed Features differ from one another in shape and mode of operation.

  The movable items arranged above and below are configured to be independently drivable, and both are arranged at the extended position so as to hide most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the other range of the third symbol display device 81 is movable when either one of the movable character arranged on the upper side or the movable character arranged on the lower side is arranged in the overhanging position In addition to being able to execute the liquid crystal rendition using this range without being hidden in the role, to perform rendition combining the liquid crystal rendition and the movable role located at the overhang position Can.

  In addition, although details will be described later, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) movable roles are arranged in the left and right direction, and the movable roles arranged on the lower side are configured to be able to move up and down independently. In addition to placing all movable parts in the extended position (see FIG. 16), only a part (for example, the left end) of the movable items is placed in the extended position, or It is possible to configure a state in which the movable part is arranged at different vertical heights at positions between the position and the standby position.

  FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311 and a rear case 310 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened from an outer wall portion 312 erected from an outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311.

  The rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 311 a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display region of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

  The operation unit 300 is disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 311a, in the inner space of the rear case 310, the first operation unit 400 in which the movable part is displaceably disposed in the path including the lower side of the opening 311a; A left / right rendering unit 600 for performing a light emission effect and the like, and a second operation unit 700 in which the movable part is disposed displaceably along a path including the upper side of the opening 311a are accommodated respectively and configured as one unit .

  Specifically, the first operation unit 400 is disposed below the opening 311 a and the second operation unit 700 is disposed above the opening 311 a on the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310. Note that FIG. 18 illustrates a state in which the first operation unit 400 and the second operation unit 700 are disassembled from the back case 310.

  The left and right rendering unit 600 includes an electric decoration board having light emitting means such as an LED inside, but the electric decoration board is disposed diagonally, and the light axis of the light emitting means goes to the left and right inward as approaching the player side It is characterized by tilting. As a result, the optical axes of the light emitting means intersect on the near side for the player, so that the light emitted from the left and right rendering unit 600 can be visually recognized three-dimensionally.

  The rear case 310 is extended as a flat plate (for example, arranged in parallel) along the rear surface of the game board 13 at the front end of the outer wall portion 312 and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) A support plate portion 313 is provided to support.

  The support plate portion 313 has a shape capable of being fitted to a fitting recess (not shown) formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a positioning protrusion 313 a protruding toward the front side, and the base plate 60 And a plurality of insertion holes 313b formed in such a manner as to allow insertion of a fastening screw to be fastened.

  By positioning the convex portion 313a in the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the back case 310 is positioned relative to the base plate 60, and a fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

  In addition, the shape of the positioning convex part 313a is not limited at all, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, it may be a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (in this embodiment, a circle or an oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60. It may be a protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) that is Further, in the case where the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 313 a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 18, in the present embodiment, a large number of support plate portions 313 are densely disposed on the left side and upper side of the rear case 310, and the formation of the support plate portion 313 is reduced on the right side and lower side. However, this is a result of designing in consideration of the balance between the improvement of the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 and the space efficiency.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of plywood laminated with plywood, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the meat portion of the base board 60 Since it becomes impossible to visually recognize, the whole back side of the area where opening formation (or formation from the side surface can be formed) in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 becomes effective as an area for effect to arrange the movable member visually. .

  On the other hand, at the portion where the support plate portion 313 is formed, the inner space of the back case 310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion 313 in a front view, and accordingly, the movable member The area which can be arranged will be narrowed. Therefore, even if the support plate portion 313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid the restriction of the arrangement range of the movable member by omitting the support plate portion 313 if it can be maintained while the strength problem is solved. It is.

  The large number of support plate portions 313 provided on the left side and the upper side of the rear case 310 in the present embodiment is related to the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the ball fired in the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed at a position other than the range where the emitted ball is visually recognized.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball preventing member 68. It is introduced into the area (see FIG. 2), and thereafter is configured to flow down the game area. In ball-and-ball games, the place where the most attention is considered to be most likely to be is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 The attention to) is usually low.

  Therefore, the lower left portion and the upper left portion based on the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62 as the range where the sphere can not reach, and the upper left portion and the upper right portion based on the upwardly convex arc It is believed that the player's attention to

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the outer edge member 73 and the surfaces of the lower left and upper left portions of the outer rail 62 with respect to the outer rail 62 are formed along the outer rail 62 and disposed on the front side of the game board 13 The block-like member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material, and in addition to the gaming board 13 being made of a plywood board which hardly transmits light, the outer edge member 73 is viewed from the front side of the gaming board 13 Since the back side of the game board 13 can not be viewed through the block-like member 74, it is considered that the player's attention is further reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 is preferentially disposed at a place where the attention power is low or a place where it is not visible. Actually, the support plate 313 is formed in the vicinity of the corner of the back case 310 while avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end of the outer rail 62 even on the left side and the upper side where the support plate 313 is formed in large numbers. Be done.

  In other words, the rigidity of the whole operation unit 300 and the game board 13 is selected by selecting the place where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from the place with low visibility (low rendering ability) in the first place. It is possible to secure a high degree of freedom in the design of the area that falls within the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball while achieving the effect of securing it.

  In this point of view, since there is a common configuration for pachinko machines in which the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) is rolled along the outer rail 62 and introduced into the game area, Can be easily disposed in the lower left, upper left and upper right portions.

  In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 extended from the lower outer wall portion 312 is disposed on the back side of the support plate portion 313 extended from the left and right and upper outer wall portions 312. . From this configuration, the positioning protrusion 313a formed on the left and right and upper support plate 313 is fitted in the fitting recess formed on the back surface of the base plate 60, while the lower support plate 313 The positioning convex part 313a to be formed is not directly fitted to the base plate 60, but is formed in a shape corresponding to a spherical flow down unit (not shown) disposed on the back side of the base plate 60. And fit into the shape. That is, the positioning convex portion 313a disposed on the lower side of the rear case 310 is indirectly fixed to the base plate 60 via the ball flow down unit.

  FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400. The first operation unit 400 includes a base member 401 which is fitted to the rear case 310 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and four composite operation units 402 having substantially the same configuration are provided on the front side of the base member 401. It is fastened and fixed to the lined position.

  The combined operation unit 402 is formed in a substantially diced shape, and includes a rotation unit 500 configured to be rotatable about an axis in the left-right direction, and a mechanism for moving the rotation unit 500 up and down. The details of the combined operation unit 402 will be described below.

  21 (a) and 21 (b) are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 402, and FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b) are back perspective views of the combined operation unit 402. FIG. 21 (a) and 22 (a) show a state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the raised position, and in FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (b), the rotation unit 500 is at the lowered position. The placed state is illustrated.

  In the combined operation unit 402, the columnar member 431 guides the rotating unit 500 in the vertical direction, and the driving motor 441 generates a driving force for moving the rotating unit 500 up and down. The electrical wiring DK1 guided to the inside of the rotation unit 500 is composed of a bundle of a plurality of electric wires, and hangs through the opposite side of the side on which the columnar member 431 is disposed It is configured to be accessible. Hereinafter, each configuration of the combined operation unit 402 will be described.

  23 and 24 are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 402. FIG. FIGS. 23 and 24 illustrate a state in which the disassembling of the rotation unit 500 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the compound operation unit 402 includes a support means 410 for supporting the rotation unit 500, a lamination means 420 laminated and fixed to the support means 410, and a moving direction of the lamination means 420. Guiding means 430 for guiding the movement of the supporting means 410 by limiting it to one direction (vertical direction in the present embodiment), and driving means 440 having a drive motor 441 for generating driving force for moving the supporting means 410; A divided base member 442 for supporting the drive motor 441, a transmission means 450 meshed with the drive gear 441a of the drive motor 441 and configured to be able to transmit a driving force, and a length corresponding to the amount of movement of the support means 410. The electric wire DK1 is mainly provided with a wiring auxiliary means 460 which can be disposed (accommodated) without being entangled or pinched.

  The support means 410 is opened in the vertical direction at a central portion of a flat plate portion 411 formed in a flat plate shape, an annular protrusion 412 provided so as to protrude annularly from the upper surface of the flat plate portion 411, and the annular protrusion 412. A deformed hole 413 formed as a through hole, a front hanging portion 414 bent downward from a front edge of the flat portion 411, and a plate-like portion continuously connected to the left end of the front hanging portion 414 A left surface hanging portion 415 bent downward from the left edge of the flat plate portion 411 and a lower end portion of the left surface hanging portion 415 are formed as a long hole extending in the front and rear direction, and the connecting member 454 of the transmission means 450 is inserted And a connecting plate portion 416 having a through hole 416a.

  The stacking means 420 is housed in an end plate member 421 configured as a substantially longitudinally symmetrical plate-like member, a recessed portion 422 formed concave on the front and rear end portions of the end plate member 421, and the recessed portion 422 Right between the end plate member 421 and the end plate member 421 disposed between the end plate member 421 and the support means 410 and covering the recessed portion 422 from the right side A lid member 424 is mainly provided.

  The guide cylindrical portion 423 is accommodated only in the recessed portion 422 of the front end portion among the recessed portions 422 recessed in the front and rear end portions of the end plate member 421, and the recessed portion of the rear end portion It is not disposed at 422 (arrangement is omitted).

  Thus, the rear side supported by the transmission means 450 when the rotary unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position or the raised position, as in the case where the guide cylindrical portion 423 is disposed at both the front and rear recessed portions 422. Since the posture deviation that occurs at the front end farthest from the end (see FIG. 34C) can be minimized, the arrangement of the rotation unit 500 can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, compared with the case where the guide cylindrical portion 423 is disposed in both the front and rear recessed portions 422, the gap between the recessed portion 422 and the columnar member 431 at the rear end supported by the transmission means 450 Can be further reduced, so that the resistance generated when the stacking means 420 moves up and down can be reduced.

  The right cover member 424 has a pair of insertion holes 424a through which fastening screws fixedly fixed to the end plate member 421 are inserted, and the right cover member 424 is penetrated from the end plate member 421 side. A plurality of insertion openings 424b which are formed so as to allow insertion of a fastening screw fixedly fixed to the portion 415 and the guide cylindrical portion 423 of the stacking means 420 are concavely receivable in a shape that makes it impossible to vertically fall off. And a recessed support portion 424c.

  The guiding means 430 includes a metal columnar member 431 disposed in a pair in the front and rear direction so as to pass at least one of the guide cylindrical portion 423 or the recessed portion 422, and a metal plate disposed on the left surface of the columnar member 431 Metal plate portion 432, an upper bent portion 433 bent rightward from the upper side portion of the metal plate portion 432, and a lower bent rightward from the lower side portion of the metal plate portion 432. It mainly includes a side bent portion 434 and a back side bent portion 435 which is formed to be bent rightward from the back side portion of the metal plate portion 432.

  The metal plate portion 432 is cut downward from the top, and is formed in a U-shape in left side view. As a result, the assembly worker or maintenance worker can reach the front and rear intermediate portions (portions between the pair of front and rear concave portions 422) of the end plate member 421 through the notched area, so assembly work or maintenance The work can be made more efficient, but the details will be described later.

  The metal plate portion 432 is disposed close to the end plate member 421 in the left-right direction at a location excluding the center portion in the front-rear direction. Thus, even if the end plate member 421 is displaced in the left-right direction, the displacement can be regulated not only by the contact with the columnar member 431 but also by the contact with the metal plate portion 432. .

  Thereby, the displacement of the laminating means 420 in the left and right direction can be suppressed, so that the supporting means 410 fastened and fixed to the laminating means 420 and the displacement of the transmission means 450 connected to the supporting means 410 in the left and right direction Can be suppressed.

  The upper bending portion 433 and the lower bending portion 434 are through holes drilled at positions overlapping in the vertical direction, and are formed into a support hole 433 a, which has a size that allows the columnar member 431 to be inserted and supported. 434a is provided.

  The columnar member 431 is inserted into the support holes 433a and 434a in the assembled state, and the end is formed to have a length slightly protruding from the upper side of the upper bending portion 433 and the lower side of the lower bending portion 434 21 (a)). A so-called "E-ring" is fitted in a groove formed in the outer diameter direction in the slightly protruding part, thereby preventing the columnar member 431 from coming off with respect to the support holes 433a and 434a.

  The lower bent portion 434 stably supports the divided base member 442 in a state of supporting the same. In this supported state, the back side plate portion of the divided base member 442 overlaps with the back side bent portion 435 in the front-rear direction, and the back side through the base member 401 (see FIG. 20) disposed on the back side of the divided base member 442 The base member 401, the divided base member 442, and the guiding means 430 can be integrally fixed by fastening and fixing the fastening screw inserted from the side to the female screw portion formed in the rear bent portion 435. .

  In the driving means 440, the components are divided into right and left parts for each function by the partition plate part 442 a of the divided base member 442. That is, on the left side of the partition plate portion 442a, a configuration (transmission means 450 etc.) for transmitting a driving force is disposed, and on the right side of the partition plate portion 442a, a configuration or power for power supply is supplied. A configuration (a main body portion of the drive motor 441, the wiring auxiliary means 460 in which the electric wiring DK1 is accommodated, and the like) is disposed. Although the illustration of the electric wiring DK1 used for power supply is omitted in FIGS. 23 and 24, the details of the relationship between the electric wiring DK1 and the wiring auxiliary means 460 and the displacement will be described later.

  The drive motor 441 is attached to the partition plate portion 442a from the right side, and the drive gear 441a projects to the left side of the partition plate portion 442a through an opening formed in the partition plate portion 442a. When the drive motor 441 is driven and the drive gear 441a is rotated in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the drive force is transmitted to the transmission means 450 via the transmission gear 451 engaged with the drive gear 441a.

  The partition plate portion 442a has a plurality of protruding portions 442b protruding in a columnar shape from the left surface to the left, and an axis fixed above the protruding portion 442b at the upper end and parallel to the protruding direction of the protruding portion 442b A metal cylindrical metal portion 442c formed in a cylindrical shape, a photocoupler type detection sensor 442d fastened and fixed in a posture in which the detection groove is disposed opposite to the metal cylindrical portion 442c, and an opening formed in the left and right direction The unit 442e is mainly provided.

  The protruding portions 442b are configured to be able to support the transmission gear 451 and the intermediate gear 452, respectively, and a female screw is formed at the tip of the protrusion, and a fastening screw with a flange is fastened and fixed to the female screw. The transmission gear 451 and the intermediate gear 452 can be supported so as not to come off. The metal cylindrical portion 442 c is formed with a diameter capable of pivotally supporting the pivoting arm member 453.

  The detection sensor 442 d is configured to be able to detect that the detection target plate portion 453 d of the rotation arm member 453 is disposed in the detection groove. Thus, the position of the pivoting arm member 453 can be detected.

  The opening 442e is an opening for passing the electric wiring DK1 reached between the divided base member 442 and the wiring auxiliary means 460 in the left-right direction and guiding it to the back side, the details will be described later.

  The transmission means 450 includes a transmission gear 451 meshing with the drive gear 441a, an intermediate gear 452 disposed on the upper side of the transmission gear 451 (the opposite side of the drive gear 441a) and meshed with the transmission gear 451, and an intermediate gear 452 thereof. And a connecting member 454 supported so as not to come off at the rotation tip of the rotating arm member 453.

  The pivoting arm member 453 is a member rotatably supported by the metal cylindrical portion 442c of the partition plate portion 442a, and is formed in a gear tooth shape along a circular arc centered on the rotation axis, An extending arm portion 453b extending radially outward at a position shifted in the axial direction with respect to the gear portion 453a and an extending tip end portion of the extending arm portion 453b form an opening in a direction parallel to the rotation axis And a detection target plate portion 453d extending along the rotational direction from the extending arm portion 453b.

  The connecting member 454 has a brass cylindrical supported portion 454a whose distal end is inserted into the through elongated hole 416a, and a flange portion 454c which is fitted on the proximal end side of the 454a and which overhangs in a flange shape at the proximal end. And a fitting lid portion 454b made of synthetic resin.

  A known E-ring (not shown) is fitted to the tip of the supported portion 454a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 454 from falling leftward from the through hole 416a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection member 454 from falling off and losing the connection member 454 in the state (the state in the middle of the assembly) before the stacking means 420 and the guide means 430 are assembled to the divided base member 442.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 22A), the right cover member 424 is disposed to face the left side of the connection member 454 (arranged so as to overlap in the left-right direction), to the left of the connection member 454. Dropout is physically restricted.

  The outer diameter of the fitting cover 454b is shorter than the vertical width of the through hole 416a, and the outer diameter of the flange 454c is longer than the vertical width of the through hole 416a. Thus, by arranging the resin fitting lid portion 454b between the through elongated hole 416a and the metal supported portion 454a, the deformation of the through elongated hole 416a can be suppressed, and in addition, the flange By forming the portion 454c so as not to pass through the through hole 416a, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 454 from falling out of the through hole 416a to the right.

  The wiring auxiliary means 460 is configured in the shape of a bottomed container from two members disposed correspondingly in the left-right direction. That is, the wiring auxiliary means 460 is disposed opposite to the right side of the partition plate portion 442a and is fixed to the partition plate portion 442a by a left member 461 and an inner shape of the left member 461 disposed opposite to the right surface of the left member 461 And a right side member 468 which is shaped to be able to cover in a left and right direction view and which is fastened and fixed to the left side member 461.

  The left side member 461 is fastened and fixed to a portion of the partition plate portion 442a which is formed to be raised to the right at the front and rear positions of the partition plate portion 442 and is disposed opposite to the plate-like opposing plate 462 A belt-like extending portion 463 extending in a band shape from the right to the right, and a support pillar portion 464 protruding rightward in a columnar shape in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the counter plate 462 and having an internal thread formed at the tip end thereof; A wire support portion 465 configured to be able to insert a small diameter member such as a binding band for supporting the electric wire DK1 is mainly provided on the diagonally upper rear side of the support column portion 464.

  Since the opposing plate 462 is fastened and fixed to the raised portion of the partition plate portion 442a as described above, the opposing plate 462 and the partitioned plate are at the front-back middle position (a position other than the raised portion) of the partition plate portion 442a. An air gap is generated between the portion 442a. The air gap functions as an air gap for passing the electrical wiring DK1.

  The electric wiring DK1 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) will be described later in detail, but via the opening 442e, via the air gap between the partition plate portion 442a and the wiring assisting means 460, via the wiring support portion 465 The support column 464 is supported by the support means 410 and the rotation unit 500 with the front side of the support column 464 facing upward.

  Therefore, the electrical wiring DK1 needs to have a length (extra length) that can correspond to the vertical movement of the support means 410 and the rotation unit 500. The electrical wiring DK1 of this extra length corresponds to the support means 410 and the rotation unit 500. Is accommodated in the wire auxiliary means 460 in a state of being loosely wound around the support column 464 when it is disposed at the lowered position.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the shape of the wiring auxiliary means 460 is designed such that the load applied to the electrical wiring DK1 loosely wound around the support column 464 is reduced. That is, when the electrical wiring DK1 is wound around the support column 464, the maximum diameter of the electrical wiring DK1 centered on the support column 464 increases as the length of the wound electrical wiring DK1 increases. If the distance between the wire extension DK1 and the electrical wiring DK1 is short, there is a possibility that a load as a reaction force is generated from the strip extension portion 463 to the electrical wiring DK1. The strip-like extending portion 463 is disposed at a predetermined interval.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lower extending portion 519 as a portion for supporting the electric wiring DK1 at a position close to the wiring auxiliary means 460 in the rotation unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the support column 464 Be done. Therefore, the electrical wiring DK1 of the extra length remaining as the support means 410 and the rotation unit 500 move to the lowered position is disposed mainly on the front side of the support column 464.

  Corresponding to this, the belt-like extension portion 463 is designed such that a larger internal space can be secured on the front side of the support column 464 with the support column 464 as a reference in the front-rear direction. Further, the belt-like extension portion 463 is a surface which is downwardly displaced toward the front side below the support column portion 464 and which is a curved surface on which the center of the radius of curvature is disposed on the lower side. Prepare.

  The functional curved surface 463a can apply a load in a diagonally upward and forward direction as a reaction force to the electrical wiring DK1 disposed in close proximity due to its shape. As a result, the electrical wiring DK1 can be easily gathered in the front range with reference to the support column 464.

  In addition, the function curved surface 463 a is formed into a curved shape protruding toward the inner side of the wiring auxiliary means 460, which makes it easy to secure a space for disposing the drive motor 441. That is, according to the curved shape of the functional curved surface 463a, the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 can be stabilized, and the wiring auxiliary means 460 and the drive motor 441 can be arranged with a minimum space.

  FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 26 is an exploded back perspective view of the rotation unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotation unit 500 is fixed to the support means 410 (see FIG. 23) and fixed inside the fixing means 510 and the fixing means 510 formed in a U shape in a front view. Both end fixing means 520 constituting the rotation center, shaft forming means 530 fixed to the both end fixing means 520 and disposed inside the U shape of fixing means 510, U shape inside of fixing means 510 and A rotating left lid 550 disposed on the left side of the shaft forming means 530, a rotating body 560 fastened and fixed to the rotating left lid 550 and having a substantially rectangular outer shape, and fastened and fixed to the right of the rotating body 560 And a rotating right cover 570 disposed inside the U-shape of the fixing means 510.

  Describing the outline of the rotating unit 500, the rotating body 560 is mainly composed of a rotating portion which is rotationally displaced about a lateral axis, and a fixing portion which mainly supports the fixing means 510 and which supports the rotating portion.

  The rotating portion includes the rotating body 560, the rotating left plate 550, the motor gear 542 meshed with the rotating left plate 550, and the driven plate 575 of the rotating right cover 570, and other configurations excluding these (fixing means 510, both end fixing means 520, the shaft forming means 530 excluding the motor gear 542, and the attitude fixing bush 571 of the rotating right cover portion 570 constitute a fixing portion.

  The fixing means 510 is a U-shaped metal plate 511 formed in a U-shape in a front view by bending the metal plate at a right angle, and a U-shaped metal disposed opposite to the left and right of the U-shaped metal plate 511 Mainly provided with left and right fixed lids 514 configured from a shape capable of constructing a closed cross section with plate 511, and guide member 516 for fastening and fixing from below the U-shaped metal plate 511 and guiding electric wiring DK1. .

  In the description of the left and right fixed lids 514, the closed cross section is not intended to assume complete sealing (adhesion), but may be any closing method in accordance with the purpose in the present embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, since the electrical wiring DK1 is passed through the closed cross section, an opening to which the electrical wiring DK1 can not pass (for example, an opening having an opening diameter smaller than the thickness of the electrical wiring DK1 or If the direction of the opening width larger than the thickness of the electrical wiring DK1 is along the longitudinal direction of the electrical wiring DK1, the opening where the accommodation of the electrical wiring DK1 is maintained can be tolerated. The details of the path of the electrical wiring DK1 will be described later.

  The U-shaped metal plate 511 has a female screw and a positioning through hole formed at an appropriate position of the long plate-like portion, and is used for alignment with the left and right fixing lid 514 and the guide member 516 and fastening and fixing.

  Both ends of the plate of the U-shaped metal plate 511 are disposed to face each other, and are cut out in different shapes on the left and right. That is, the substantially circular first opening 512 is formed on the left side, and the substantially wedge-shaped second opening 513 and a pair of circular holes 513a are formed on the right side.

  The guide member 516 is configured so as to leave a gap between a deformed hole 517 which is formed in a substantially wedge shape vertically in the lateral center position and the U-shaped metal plate 511 on the right side of the deformed hole 517. A bottom portion 518 and a lower extending portion 519 extending downward from the right rear end of the lowered bottom portion 518 are mainly provided.

  The deformed hole 517 is located above the deformed hole 413 (see FIG. 23) and has a size capable of guiding the electrical wiring DK1. The electric wiring DK1 which has passed above the deformed hole 517 is disposed between the lowered bottom portion 518 and the U-shaped metal plate 511, is bent upward, and is made of the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lids 514. It is disposed between the two end fixing means 520 and is disposed on the inner diameter side of the right fixing bush 522 of the both end fixing means 520, and is arranged inside the U-shaped metal plate 511. The state in the path of the electrical wiring DK1 will be described later.

  The lower extending portion 519 is a portion configured to be able to support the electric wiring DK1 that moves up and down in response to the up and down movement with a binding band. That is, the formation portion 411a is formed to the right of the deformed hole 413 of the flat plate portion 411 so as to be able to fix the binding band. The electrical wiring DK1 is fixed to the forming portion 411a by a binding band, and is fixed to a lower extension portion 519 disposed on the back side and below the forming portion 411a by a binding band.

  Thus, the electric wiring DK1 can be moved to the back side, so that the electric wiring DK1 is displaced to the front side and is sandwiched between the front upper edge of the strip-like extended portion 463 and the front hanging portion 414 of the support means 410. Can be avoided (see FIG. 23).

  Among the configurations of the lower extending portion 519, the plate portion constituting the right side surface functions as a restricting portion for preventing the binding band from rising. That is, the binding band is maintained in a state fixed to the lower end of the lower extending part 519 in the U-shaped part projecting downward, and by controlling the rising of the binding band, the electric power for the lower extending part 519 is maintained. The fixing position of the wiring DK1 can be limited to the vicinity of the lower end portion of the lower extending portion 519.

  The both end fixing means 520 includes a left fixing bush 521 fitted into the first opening 512 of the U-shaped metal plate 511 from the left side, and a right fixing bush 522 fitting into the second opening 513 from the right side.

  The left fixed bush 521 and the right fixed bush 522 have forming portions (convex portions) fitted in notches (concave portions) formed on the upper and lower sides of both the first opening 512 and the second opening 513, and these uneven fitting Thus, the posture is stabilized, and positioning in the axial direction (left and right direction) is performed by the flange-like portion formed in a flange shape having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the first opening 512 and the second opening 513.

  That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the left fixed bush 521 and the right fixed bush 522 are supported by the flange portion being disposed between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lid 514 The posture is fixed by the fitting.

  In the left fixed bush 521, a support hole 521a having a D-shaped cross section is formed at the rotational axis position. The support hole 521a is a portion for supporting one end of the shaft forming means 530, the details of which will be described later.

  The right fixing bush 522 has a pair of insertion holes 523 which are formed so as to be insertable through a fastening screw which is inserted into the circular hole 513a, and an annular shape which can be fitted inside the second opening 513 and protrudes leftward An annular protrusion 524 and an omitted portion 525 in which the formation of a flange-shaped portion is omitted for the purpose of securing a passage for the electrical wiring DK1 in the substantially lower half portion are mainly provided.

  The annular protrusion 524 is formed to have a protruding length exceeding the plate thickness of the U-shaped metal plate 511. Thereby, the posture alignment of the protruding fastening portion 532 of the shaft configuration means 530 can be easily performed, but the details will be described later.

  The shaft constituting means 530 is opposed to the shaft right main body portion 531 fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511 by screwing in a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 523 and the left side of the shaft right body portion 531 A shaft left main body 535 disposed and fastened and fixed to the shaft right main body 531; a drive motor 541 fastened and fixed to the shaft left main body 535; and a motor gear 542 secured to the drive shaft of the drive motor 541; The electric decoration substrate 543 disposed on the front side of the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535 and the front surface side of the electric decoration substrate 543 are stacked and arranged, and the light diffusion shape is formed on the back surface Mainly provided with a light diffusion plate 545 positioned by being pinched by front and rear, left, right, upper and lower parts in the section 531 and the shaft left main body 535, and a photocoupler type detection sensor 547 fastened and fixed from the right .

  As described above, the shaft configuration means 530 includes a plurality of configurations (ie, the drive motor 541, the electric decoration substrate 543, and the detection sensor 547) that require the supply of electricity. Therefore, it is considered to be a problem to arrange the electrical wiring DK1 in a compact manner. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all of the connection terminals 541a and 547a of the electric wiring DK1 are put together in the area between the facing of the axial right main body 531 and the axial left main body 535.

  That is, the connection terminal 541a of the drive motor 541 is disposed in the motor main body portion disposed so as to be surrounded by the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535, and the connection terminal (not shown) ) Is disposed on the back side facing between the axial right main body portion 531 and the axial left main body portion 535, and the connection terminal 547a of the detection sensor 547 passes through the opening 533a of the axial right main body portion 531. Is disposed so as to project to the left side (the axial left main body 535 side) of the

  As a result, it is possible to perform the supply of electricity without excess or deficiency only by guiding the electrical wiring DK1 to the area between the facing of the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535. It can be contained in the area between the facing of the main body 531 and the shaft left main body 535 (the area on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped wall extended toward the other side).

  Further, fastening of the shaft forming means 530 and the U-shaped metal plate 511, fastening of the shaft right main body 531 and the shaft left main body 535, fastening of the shaft left main body 535 and the drive motor 541, shaft right body 531 The fastening direction of fastening between the sensor 547 and the detection sensor 547 is unified in the left-right direction (the direction parallel to the rotation axis). Therefore, the radial dimension of the shaft forming means 530 can be easily reduced.

  Thus, in addition to being able to integrate the main functional parts by the shaft configuration means 530, the electrical wiring DK1 can be compactly stored. Hereinafter, details of each configuration of the axis configuration means 530 will be described.

  The axial right main body portion 531 is a pair of front and rear members protruding toward the right and a protruding fastening portion 532 in which a female screw is formed at a protruding tip, and a position of the detection sensor 547 below the protruding fastening portion 532 The opening 533a has a size that allows the connection terminal 547a to pass through, and a size that allows the electrical wiring DK1 (and the connector disposed at the tip) to be inserted at the upper position of the protruding fastening portion 532 And a pair of locking claws 534 protruding like a claw at a position with a gap on the front side of the front plate of the shaft right main body 531. Prepare for

  The posture of the protruding fastening portion 532 is fixed by loosely fitting to the annular protrusion 524 of the right fixing bush 522, and the tip end portion abuts on the U-shaped metal plate 511, and is inserted into the circular hole 513a and the insertion hole 523. By screwing in the inserted fastening screw, the U-shaped metal plate 511 is fastened and fixed. Further, although the protruding fastening portion 532 is inserted into the insertion hole 572 of the posture fixing bush 571, the details will be described later.

  The locking claw portion 534 is a portion for supporting the electric decoration substrate 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 so as to be sandwiched from the left and right direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 21). In addition, by sandwiching the electric decoration board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 (directly or indirectly) by a pair of restricting projections 534a protruding on the front side at the upper and lower end portions of the front plate portion, it is possible to It is configured to be able to regulate displacement.

  The shaft left main body portion 535 has a plate-like portion 536 formed in a plate shape which intersects the rotation axis (horizontal direction axis) at a right angle, and a cylindrical shape projecting rightward from the plate-like portion 536 A pair of projecting fastening portions 537 in which female screws are formed, a pivot portion 538 projecting cylindrically leftward from the plate portion 536 along the rotation axis, and a front plate portion of the shaft left main body 535 A pair of locking claws 539 are provided mainly in the shape of claws at a position where a gap is formed on the front side.

  The protruding fastening portion 537 protrudes to the same plane as the plane on which the right end of the arc-shaped wall of the shaft left main body 535 is disposed. In this case, the arc-shaped wall of the shaft left main body 535 and the projecting fastening portion 537 are flush with the plate which is a component plate of the shaft right main body 531 and is disposed in parallel with the plate 536 It can be made to abut.

  Thereby, the shaft right main body portion 531 can be stably disposed relative to the shaft left main body portion 535, and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole formed in the shaft right main body portion 531 can be easily protruded and fastened Since the screw can be screwed into the female screw at the tip of the portion 537, the shaft right main body 531 can be easily fastened and fixed to the shaft left main body 535.

  The shaft support portion 538 is configured in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly shorter than a circular opening that is formed in a circular shape at the center of the flanged gear 551 of the rotating left lid 550, thereby rotatably shafting the flanged gear 551. Support. In addition, the shaft support portion 538 is configured to be able to be fitted to the support hole 521 a by forming the tip end thereof in a D shape slightly smaller than the support hole 521 a.

  That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the shaft support portion 538 is non-rotatably supported by fitting with the support hole 521a, and functions as a portion for rotatably supporting the rotating left lid portion 550.

  The locking claw portion 539 is formed in substantially the same shape as the locking claw portion 534 of the shaft right main body portion 531, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the electric decoration substrate 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 are viewed from the left and right. Support to sandwich. At this time, by interposing the electric decoration board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 between the front plate portion and the locking claw portions 534 and 539 arranged with a gap on the back side, the displacement in the front-rear direction can also be regulated. .

  In addition, by sandwiching (directly or indirectly) the electric decoration board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 with a pair of restriction protrusions 539a protruding on the front side at the upper and lower end portions of the front plate portion, vertical Regulating displacement.

  Thereby, without using separate fixing means (for example, fastening screws) for fixing the electric decoration substrate 543 and the light diffusion plate 545, the shape of the shaft right main body 531 and the shaft left main body 535 is utilized Thus, the electric decoration board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 can be fixed to the axial right main body 531 and the axial left main body 535 in accordance with the fastening and fixing of the axial right main body 531 and the axial left main body 535.

  The electric decoration board 543 is provided with a plurality of LED members 544 arranged side by side at the left end, and the LED members 544 are arranged such that the optical axis extends rightward along the surface of the electric decoration board 543 There is. The plurality of LED members 544 are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can perform emission effects of multiple colors with a small number of LEDs.

  The light diffusion plate 545 has a light diffusion shape formed on the back surface, and the light diffusion shape is formed so that light can be surface-emitted in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light diffusion plate 545. Thereby, the rotating body 560 to which the light transmitted through the light diffusion plate 545 is irradiated can be illuminated uniformly, while reducing the number of the LED members 544.

  The detection sensor 547 is disposed on the inner side of the rotating body 560 on the right side opposite to the left side where the configuration for transmitting the driving force such as the drive motor 541 and the transmission gear 552 is disposed. Thereby, the space inside the rotating body 560 can be effectively used and arranged compactly.

  By disposing the detection sensor 547 inside the rotating body 560, the displacement of the detection sensor 547 can be easily performed along with the vertical movement of the rotating body 560. In other words, when the detection sensor 547 is disposed outside the rotating body 560, a member supporting the detection sensor 547 is mostly disposed outside the rotating body 560. In order to vertically displace the detection sensor 547 in accordance with the vertical displacement, it is necessary to similarly displace the member supporting the detection sensor 547.

  On the other hand, in the case where the detection sensor 547 is disposed inside the rotary body 560 as in the present embodiment, the rotary body is disposed by arranging the detection sensor 547 in a member constituting the rotation shaft of the rotary body 560. The detection sensor 547 can be configured to be moved up and down in accordance with the up and down displacement 560 (up and down displacement of a member that constitutes the rotation shaft).

  The detection sensor 547 is disposed in a posture in which the detection groove faces the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotating body 560. Thus, the detection target portion 577 protruding in the axial direction from the eccentric position of the rotary body 560 can be configured to pass through the detection groove.

  The rotating left lid 550 mainly includes a flanged gear 551 pivotally supported by the pivot 538, and a driven plate 555 fixed in the rotational direction with respect to the flanged gear 551.

  The flanged gear 551 is a transmission gear 552 disposed so as to be able to mesh with the motor gear 542 and a step with a stepped disc shape extending radially outward from an axial end of the transmission gear 552 The disc portion 553 and a specific position on the outer circumference of the small diameter circle of the stepped disc portion 553 (in the present embodiment, a position at an interval of 120 degrees that divides the circumference into three equal parts) A plurality of projecting portions 554 to be provided are mainly provided.

  The driven plate 555 is provided with a deformed opening 556 having a slightly larger shape than a shape in which the small diameter circle of the stepped disc portion 553 and the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 are continuously connected in the rotational axis direction.

  When the deformed opening 556 is externally fitted to the small diameter circle and the projecting portion 554 of the stepped disc portion 553, positional deviation of the driven plate 555 with respect to the flanged gear 551 in the rotational direction can be prevented.

  In addition, since the large diameter circle of the stepped disc portion 553 has a larger shape than the deformed opening 556, the flanged gear 551 is restricted from penetrating the deformed opening 556 to the right.

  The shape of the left side of the flanged gear 551 is between the U-shaped metal plate 511 in a state of being in contact with an overhanging portion that is annularly projected from the periphery of the support hole 521a of the left fixed bush 521 to the right. The gap is designed to be open.

  Thus, when the rotating body 560 rotates, the left side surface of the flanged gear 551 can be configured to rub only with the annular projecting portion of the left fixed bush 521, and the flanged gear 551 and the U-shaped metal plate 511 can be configured. Can be avoided. Therefore, the wear of the flanged gear 551 can be suppressed.

  The rotating body 560 is formed of a light transmitting resin material, and includes four plate-like members on the surface of which different or identical patterns and figures are formed. The rotating left cover 550 and the rotating right cover 570 are provided. And a substantially cubic shape by fastening and fixing, and the details will be described later.

  The rotating right cover portion 570 is rotatably supported by the posture fixing bush 571 having a pair of insertion holes 572 in which the protruding fastening portion 532 of the shaft forming means 530 can be inserted so as to be insertable. The drive plate 575 is mainly provided.

  The posture fixing bush 571 is configured such that the outer diameter of the outer peripheral surface is different, similarly to the stepped disc portion 553 of the flanged gear 551. That is, the right end portion is configured to be larger in diameter than the left side portion, thereby defining the limit position when the driven plate 575 is displaced to the right with respect to the attitude fixing bush 571. Thereby, the driven plate 575 can be prevented from dropping off from the posture fixing bush 571.

  The driven plate 575 has an axially supported hole 576 which is bored in a circular shape slightly larger than the small diameter circle of the posture fixing bush 571 at the central portion, and an arc shape concentric with the central axis of the axially supported hole 576. It mainly includes a detected portion 577 protruding leftward.

  The driven plate 575 is disposed in a gap (see FIG. 30A) between the right end portion of the arc-shaped portion disposed on the right side of the axial right main body portion 531 and the flange portion of the attitude fixing bush 571. Thus, the displacement in the rotational axis direction (left and right direction) is restricted.

  In addition, since the driven plate 575 is supported in a sliding manner on the outer peripheral surface of the large diameter cylindrical portion of the posture fixing bush 571, the driven plate 575 is rotating as compared with the case where it is pivotally supported by the small diameter rotation shaft. It is possible to stabilize the posture.

  The to-be-detected part 577 is disposed to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21). The presence or absence of the detection target 577 by the detection sensor 547 (the posture in which the detection target 577 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 or the non-formation range of the detection target 577 faces the detection sensor 547 It is possible to make the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determine the attitude of the rotating body 560 by determining whether the attitude has not entered the unit 577).

  FIG. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating left cover 550 and the rotating body 560, and FIG. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body 560 and the rotating right cover 570. In FIG. 27, the facing surface of the rotating left cover 550 and the rotating body 560 is illustrated as facing front, and in FIG. 28, the facing surface of the rotating right cover 570 and the rotating body 560 is facing front It is illustrated by. That is, with the back side of the opposing surface as the axis, the front side is illustrated as being separated.

  The rotating body 560 is formed in a rectangular cylindrical shape by a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) surface configuration members 560a to 560d configured in similar shapes, so the surface configuration member 560a will be described in detail, Only the differences between the other surface constituent members 560b to 560d will be described, and the detailed description will be omitted.

  The surface configuration member 560 a has a substantially square plate-like portion 561 forming an outer wall of the rotating body 560 with a decorative pattern formed on the outer surface, and a plate-like portion having a shape that is rotationally symmetrical with respect to the center point of the plate-like portion 561 And a pair of symmetrical overhanging portions 562 projecting inward from left and right end portions of the sensor 561.

  The symmetrical overhanging portion 562 is stacked on the opposing plate portion 563 disposed to face the driven plate 555 or the follower plate 575 and to the left and right inside of the opposing plate portion 563 and is formed to project forward and backward outward of the opposing plate portion 563 Mainly includes a left and right facing portion 564, a fastening assisting portion 565 stacked on the left and right inside of the left and right facing portion 564 to secure a screw-in thickness, and a posture matching portion 566 bored in the facing plate portion 563. .

  The plate-like portion 561 is provided with a decorative pattern different from that of the surface component members 560a to 560d. Thereby, the rotating body 560 is rotated, and the surface configuration members 560a to 560d facing the player change (periodically) to change a plurality of types of figures and patterns visually recognized through the rotating body 560 (in the present embodiment, Can be changed to 4).

  More specifically, on the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the surface constituent member 560a, a decorative pattern consisting of a figure indicating “Δ” (triangle, triangle) is provided. On the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the surface constituent member 560b, (Question mark) is displayed on the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the surface component 560c, a decorative pattern formed of a figure indicating an exclamation mark (!) On the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the member 560d, a decorative pattern made of a figure showing “o” (circle, circle) is formed respectively.

  In the composite operation unit 402 (see FIG. 19) in which four right and left units are arranged side by side, a common decorative pattern is formed on the surface configuration members 560a, 560b, and 560d, while the surface configuration member 560c is formed. Different decorative patterns are formed.

  That is, on the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the surface component 560c of the compound operation unit 402 disposed on the leftmost side, a compound operation unit in which a decorative pattern consisting of a figure indicating “H” is disposed second from the left end On the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the surface constituent member 560c 402, a plate-like portion 561 of the surface constituent member 560c of the combined operation unit 402 is arranged with a decorative pattern consisting of a figure showing "I" third from the left end. On the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the surface constituent member 560c of the combined operation unit 402, the decorative pattern consisting of the figure indicating "T" is arranged on the rightmost side, "!" (Exclamation mark A decorative pattern consisting of a figure showing) is formed respectively, and its use will be described later.

  The surface of the central portion of the opposing plate portion 563 on the side of the rotation shaft is formed in an arc shape that forms a part of the same circle in the surface configuration members 560a to 560d, and one side of the front and rear end portions , And a concave portion 563b is formed on the other side (the rear side of the surface component 560a).

  The concave portion 563 b is formed in a shape that can be fitted in a state where the convex portion 563 a is rotated 90 degrees around the horizontal axis. For example, in the concave shape portion 563b on the left side of the surface structure member 560a, a lower convex shape portion 563a of the surface structure member 560b corresponding to a state rotated 90 degrees around the horizontal axis with respect to the surface structure member 560a. To fit. At the same time, the lower concave portion 563b of the surface configuration member 560b is fitted to the left convex portion 563a of the surface configuration member 560a.

  Note that the shapes of the convex portion 563a and the concave portion 563b can be arbitrarily set as long as the above conditions are satisfied. For example, it may be a shape with a corner, a semicircular shape, or an inclined shape. In the present embodiment, the convex shaped portion 563 a is configured as a portion that exerts the fastening force of the fastening screw by setting the convex shaped portion 563 a to a size that allows the female screw to be configured.

  In the same manner, by fitting the adjacent surface component members 560a to 560d, the rectangular cylindrical shape can be aligned. The lateral displacement of the surface configuration members 560 a to 560 d is prevented by the left and right facing portions 564.

  That is, in a state in which the surface configuration members 560a to 560d form a rectangular cylindrical shape, the left and right facing portions 564 abut against the concave shaped portions 563b of the adjacent surface configuration members 560a to 560d from the inside in the left and right direction Will be

  For example, with respect to the left and right facing portion 564 disposed on the front side of the surface configuration member 560a, it is continuous with the concave portion 563b disposed on the lower side of the surface configuration member 560d from its left side The right side is in contact (arranged). That is, after arranging the rectangular cylindrical shape to be able to be configured, the left and right positions of the surface configuration member 560d with respect to the surface configuration member 560a are matched by displacing the surface configuration member 560d rightward with respect to the surface configuration member 560a. be able to.

  In addition, with respect to left and right facing portion 564 disposed on the lower side (lower right side) of surface configuration member 560d, a concave shape disposed on the front side of surface configuration member 560a from the right side (outside in the left and right direction of rotating body 560). The left side surface continuous with the portion 563b abuts (is disposed opposite). That is, after arranging the rectangular cylindrical shape to be able to be configured, the left and right positions of the surface configuration member 560d with respect to the surface configuration member 560a are matched by displacing the surface configuration member 560d rightward with respect to the surface configuration member 560a. be able to.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, by making the shape of the symmetrical overhang portion 562 rotationally symmetrical with respect to the center point of the plate-like portion 561, one adjacent surface component member (for example, a surface component member) By displacing the other surface component (for example, the surface component 560d) in the left and right direction with respect to 560a), the left and right positions of the other surface component with respect to one surface component can be matched.

  The posture alignment portion 566 is formed as posture alignment portions 566a to 566d in the surface component members 560a to 560d, and is configured as through holes having different shapes in the surface component members 560a to 560d.

  That is, the posture alignment portion 566a formed on the surface configuration member 560a is bored in a circular shape in cross section, and the posture alignment portion 566b formed on the surface configuration member 560b has a short direction along the extending direction of the plate portion 561 The posture matching portion 566c formed in the rectangular shape and formed on the surface configuration member 560c is formed in the rectangular shape having a long direction along the extending direction of the plate-like portion 561 and formed on the surface configuration member 560d. The portion 566 d is drilled in an equilateral triangular shape in cross section.

  The driven plate 555 includes a plurality of fitting convex portions 555a to 555d which are provided in a shape corresponding to the posture aligning portions 566a to 566d from positions which can be inserted into the posture aligning portions 566a to 566d.

  That is, the pair of fitting convex portions 555a is projected in a circular shape in cross section, and the pair of fitting convex portions 555b is projected in a rectangular shape having a short side along the approaching side of the driven plate 555, The fitting convex portion 555c protrudes in a rectangular shape whose side in the direction along the approaching side of the driven plate 555 is long, and the pair of fitting convex portions 555d protrudes in an equilateral triangle shape in cross section.

  The driven plate 575 includes a plurality of fitting convex portions 575a to 575d which are provided in a shape corresponding to the posture aligning portions 566a to 566d from positions which can be inserted into the posture aligning portions 566a to 566d.

  That is, the pair of fitting convex portions 575a is projected in a circular shape in cross section, and the pair of fitting convex portions 575b is projected in a rectangular shape having a short side along the approaching side of the driven plate 575, The fitting convex portion 575c protrudes in a rectangular shape whose side in a direction along the adjacent side of the driven plate 575 is long, and the pair of fitting convex portions 575d protrudes in an equilateral triangle shape in cross section.

  As described above, by configuring the posture matching portions 566a to 566d, the fitting convex portions 555a to 555d, and the fitting convex portions 575a to 575d to have corresponding shapes, the rotating left lid portion in a state where the relative angle is appropriate. The rotating body 560 and the rotating right cover portion 570 can be fitted together and can be fastened and fixed.

  In addition, as an actual assembly procedure, after assembling all four surface component members 560a to 560d of the rotating body 560, fitting them in a rectangular cylindrical shape, aligning the left and right positions, the fitting convex of the rotating left lid 550 The rotary members are fitted by fitting the portions 555a to 555d into the posture matching portions 566a to 566d of the rotary body 560 and screwing the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes formed at the four corners into the female threads of the convex portion 563a. 560 and the rotating left cover 550 can be fastened and fixed. Next, by screwing the fastening screw in the same procedure, the rotating right cover 570 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating body 560 as well.

  In the present embodiment, the fitting direction and the fastening and fixing direction of the rotating left cover 550 and the rotating right cover 570 with respect to the posture matching parts 566a to 566d of the rotating body 560 are both in the left-right direction (a direction parallel to the rotation axis). It is designed to be

  Thereby, since a fastening screw can be excluded from on the outer surface (display surface) of each surface component member 560a-560d of the rotary body 560, it can avoid that a fastening screw is visually recognized on a display surface. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for the seal member for hiding the fastening screw, and to form a decorative pattern using the entire area (total area) of the outer surface (display surface) of each surface component 560a-560d. As a result, the size (area or density) of the decorative pattern with respect to the size (area) of each component 560 a to 560 d can be increased.

  Here, for example, one surface component (for example, the surface component 560a) may be fastened and fixed to the rotating left lid 550, and then another surface component (for example, the surface component 560d) may be assembled. The fitting convex portion 555d of the rotating left lid 550 fastened and fixed to the one surface component member 560a interferes with the opposing plate portion 563 of the other surface component member 560d. Therefore, the concave portion 563b of the other surface component 560d can not slide between the left and right facing portion 564 of the one surface component 560a and the driven plate 555, and can not be assembled.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotating left lid 550 and the rotating right lid 570 can be fastened and fixed only after all the surface components 560a to 560d are combined in a rectangular tube shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent assembly errors (for example, assembling in a state in which any of the surface components 560a to 560d is insufficient).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the fitting convex portions 555a to 555d and 575a to 575d can strengthen the rigidity of the rotating left lid 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right lid 570 by fitting, and as a fitting target The shapes of the left and right lids 550, 560, and 570 can be assembled in an appropriate posture by matching their shapes with the posture alignment units 566a to 566d, and the assembly procedures are limited. At the same time, it is possible to achieve the effect of preventing the members 560a to 560d from being left behind.

  29 (a) and 29 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 402 of the first operation unit 400. FIG. 29 (a) and 29 (b), a perspective view in another direction is illustrated, and the rotation unit 500 is disposed in a posture in which the lower surface is directed to the front side.

  The annular protrusion 412 is a C-shaped protrusion in a top view having a dividing portion 412 a (cut) on the right side, and an overhanging shape portion 516 a corresponding to the dividing portion 412 a is formed on the lower surface of the guide member 516 .

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the overhang shape portion 516a is disposed in the dividing portion 412a, whereby the attitude of the rotation unit 500 with respect to the support means 410 is defined. In a state where the posture of the rotation unit 500 is defined, the guide screw 516 is fastened and fixed to the support means 410 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 413a into the fastening portion 517a where the female screw is formed. Ru.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the deformed hole 413 and the deformed hole 517 are communicated as the passage of the electric wiring DK1, but the inner shapes forming the outer frame of the passage are different. The difference in shape corresponds to the difference in the aspect of the electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 21) guided from the deformed hole 413 or the deformed hole 517.

  More specifically, the electric wiring DK1 is vertically displaced below the deformed hole 413 as the support means 410 moves up and down, while above the deformed hole 517 (on the side of the rotation unit 500), the arrangement of the support means 410 is concerned. It is fixedly arranged. Therefore, it is preferable to make it easy to correspond to the vertical displacement below the deformed hole 413, and it is preferable to correspond to the path for fixing the electrical wiring DK1 above the deformed hole 517. Hereinafter, the aspect of the electrical wiring DK1 of the present embodiment in this aspect will be described.

  In the present embodiment, below the deformed hole 413, the electric wiring DK1 formed of a bundle of a plurality of electric wires is a member in which a spiral cut is inserted in a tube-shaped member formed of a flexible resin material (so-called By bundling in a spiral tube, it is configured as a wire bundle having a circular cross section.

  In this embodiment, a spiral tube is wound at least in the range of the electric wiring DK1 that can enter (enter and exit) the wiring auxiliary means 460.

  Since the electrical wiring DK1 is configured as a wire bundle having a substantially circular cross section, resistance to the curving of the electrical wiring DK1 and the direction in which the electrical wiring DK1 is curved in any direction along with the vertical movement of the support means 410 It can be configured such that a large difference does not occur in the load applied with the bending.

  As compared with the shape of the deformed hole 517, the deformed hole 413 has the front-rear width of the deformed hole 413 shortened in the left-right direction so that the electric wire DK1 can be easily arranged into a wire bundle having a circular cross section. Thus, the electric wires of the electric wiring DK1 can be prevented from being arranged to spread in the front-rear direction, but even if there are many electric wires, they can be easily arranged to spread in the left-right direction. When the DK 1 is guided to the right from the deformed hole 413 and fixed at the forming portion 411 a by a fixing member such as a binding band, a wire bundle having a short longitudinal width and a substantially circular cross section can be easily configured.

  The cross-sectional shape of the wire bundle of the electrical wiring DK1 does not have to be circular, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the cross section of the wire bundle is likely to be elongated in the left-right direction as the number of wires constituting the electric wire DK1 increases, but even in this case, the electric wire DK1 is curved compared to the left and right. Thus, the resistance and load in the case of bending in the front-rear direction can be reduced. The curvature in the front-rear direction is an aspect of the curvature that is likely to occur in the present embodiment, but the details will be described later.

  FIG. 30 (a) is a front exploded perspective view of a part of the configuration of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30 (b) is a perspective view schematically showing a harness constituting the electrical wiring DK1. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), in the electrical wiring DK1, a plurality of covered flexible electric wires are connected and fixed at substantially equal intervals to a connector as a connection end.

  In the rotation unit 500 of the present embodiment, connectors are respectively connected to the drive motor 541, the detection sensor 547, and the electric decoration board 543, and the total number of wires extending from each connector is sixteen.

  In FIG. 30A, the U-shaped metal plate 511, the right and left fixed lid 514, the guide member 516, the both end fixing means 520, the shaft right main body 531, and the shaft left main body in the rotation unit 500. The portion 535, the drive motor 541, the detection sensor 547, and the attitude fixing bush 571 are illustrated, and the left and right fixing lid 514 and the guide member 516 are illustrated spaced apart from the U-shaped metal plate 511 Only the lid 514 is illustrated in a different view.

  In FIG. 30A, the guidance of the electrical wiring DK1 with respect to the rotation unit 500 will be mainly described. The electric wiring DK1 passing upward through the deformed hole 517 is covered with a gap having a long front-rear width and a short top and bottom width between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower portion 518. It is preferable not to pile up and down, but to arrange in order back and forth.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide member 516 is formed at the right end of the deformed hole 517 so as to lower one step from the lowered bottom 518 in a fan shape in top view, and the longitudinal direction of the plurality of electric wires constituting the electrical wiring DK1 A fan-shaped adjusting unit 517 b is provided to adjust the degree of spread. The function of the fan-shaped adjusting unit 517b will be described with reference to FIG.

  31 (a) is a top view of the guide member 516, and FIG. 31 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 and the electrical wiring DK1 along line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 31 (a). 31 c is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 and the electrical wiring DK1 along the line XXXIc-XXXIc in FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 31 (d) is a view along the line XXXId-XXXId in FIG. FIG. 31E is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 and the electrical wiring DK1 taken along the line XXXIe-XXXIe in FIG. 31D.

  In FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (d), a part of the path of each electric wire of the electrical wiring DK1 guided through the deformed hole 517 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. 31 (b) and 31. In (c) and FIG. 31 (e), an example of the arrangement of the electric wires of the electric wiring DK1 is illustrated.

  That is, each electric wire of the electric wiring DK1 has a lower corner portion where the deformed hole 517 and the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b constitute two surfaces and a corner portion disposed on the right side of the lower corner portion. Is curved so as to be placed close to (abutment) with the upper corner portion constituting the two surfaces, and in that state, dispersion (spread) in the front-rear direction is restricted by the front and rear wall portions of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b (FIG. 31) (A) and FIG. 31 (c)).

  In other words, the degree of dispersion of the electrical wiring DK1 can be adjusted by adjusting the formation angle of the front and rear wall portions of the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the fan-shaped adjustment is performed such that the extension line 517x linearly extended from the end of the front and rear wall of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b in top view becomes a straight line reaching the corner of the lowered bottom 518 The front and rear wall portions of the portion 517b are configured.

  Thereby, the degree of dispersion of the electrical wiring DK1 is maximized while the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed in one plane (the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower portion 518) above the deformed hole 517. be able to. That is, in the vicinity of the right end portion of the lowered bottom portion 518, the wires of the electrical wiring DK1 can be easily distributed and arranged with the front-rear width of the lowered bottom portion 518 (see FIG. 31B).

  In the present embodiment, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b is designed such that the front-rear distance at the left end is about 6.4 [mm] and the inclination angle of the front and rear inclined walls with respect to the left-right direction is 35 degrees (center angle 70 degrees). Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, the electric wires DK1 are not vertically folded over the range from the right end of the lowered bottom portion 518 to the central portion of the fastening portion 516b, and the bottom surface of the lowered bottom portion 518 In the state where each electric wire abuts, it is possible to arrange. That is, the dimensions (in the present embodiment, about 11.2 mm for 16 wires) required for the electric wires of the outer diameter (in the present embodiment, about 0.7 mm) to be arranged side by side on the same plane. ] The front and back width (about 15.4 [mm] in this embodiment) of the above dimensions is secured.

  Thereby, even if the depth of the lower bottom portion 518 (the dimension of the gap between the lower surface of the U-shaped metal plate 511) is designed to be small (about 2 mm in this embodiment), around the electrical wiring DK1. It can be made easy to prevent that a compression load is given to electric wiring DK1 from the component assembled.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated for the shape of the fan-shaped adjustment part 517b. For example, when the front and rear width is large compared to the shape of the present embodiment, each wire of the electrical wiring DK1 can be lowered from the vicinity of the left and right center of the lowered bottom 518 and extended to the front and rear width of the bottom 518 While there is an advantage that the load applied to the electric wire from the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517 b can be reduced even when the number of electric wires is large, the front and rear walls of the guide member 516 before reaching the right end of the lower bottom 518 There is also a disadvantage that the electric wire may be bent (bent) in the plane close to the portion and between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lowered bottom portion 518.

  Also, for example, when the front and rear width is small compared to the shape of the present embodiment, the possibility of bending (bending) of the electric wire in the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower portion 518 can be reduced. While there is an advantage that the width of the passage of the electric wire is narrowed, there is also a disadvantage that the load given to the electric wire from the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b tends to be large when the number of electric wires is large.

  Therefore, the shape of the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b in this embodiment is advantageous in that the possibility of bending (bending) of the electric wire in the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower portion 518 can be reduced (electrical wiring This is a preferable shape in that the width of the wire passage can be secured as wide as possible while ensuring that DK1 is lowered along a horizontal straight line and reaching the right end of the bottom 518). It can be said.

  Further, the extension line 517x serves as a standard for the arrangement range of each wire of the electrical wiring DK1 and mainly serves as a standard for the outer edge of the arrangement, but is configured to intersect on the right with respect to the center of the deformed hole 517. In other words, the extension lines 517x intersect with each other on the right side of the straight line connecting the centers of the upper and lower pair of fastening portions 517a.

  Thereby, the position where the electric wires of the electrical wiring DK1 are gathered on the lower side of the deformed hole 517 can be disposed to the right of the center of the deformed hole 517 (see FIG. 31E). Therefore, as schematically illustrated in FIG. 31 (d), even if the electric wiring DK1 passes only the range to the right of the deformed hole 517 in relation to the arrangement of the formation portion 411a, each wire is sufficient. The electrical wiring DK1 can be guided to the forming portion 411a (see FIG. 23) in a state of being gathered.

  As described above, when the degree (state) of dispersion of the electrical wiring DK1 changes before and after the passage, the deformed hole 517 is formed in a shape that can assist the change. Therefore, compared with the case where the degree of dispersion (state) of each wire of electric wiring DK1 changes rapidly, the possibility of bending each wire can be reduced, and the load given to electric wiring DK1 is reduced. be able to.

  The guide member 516 is provided with a plurality of fastening portions 516 b constituted by positioning pins used for fastening with the U-shaped metal plate 511 and insertion holes for fastening screw insertion fastened to the U-shaped metal plate 511 There is.

  Since the fastening portion 516b is also disposed at the lower bottom portion 518 where the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed, the disposition area of the electrical wiring DK1 is somewhat limited, but in the present embodiment, the disposition is set so as to minimize this limitation. It is devising.

  First, a plurality of fastening portions 516b are disposed on the opposite side (left side) of the lower bottom portion 518 as a position not interfering with the electrical wiring DK1 to secure the fastening force, thereby minimizing the number of fastening portions 516b in the lower bottom portion 518. It is

  The fastening portion 516b may not be disposed at the lower bottom portion 518. In this case, the weight of the electrical wiring DK1 fixed to the lower extending portion 519, the vibration or load generated when moving the rotating unit 500 up and down The U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower portion 518 may be misaligned. In order to avoid this, the guide member 516 may be made thicker, but in that case, the thickness of the guide member 516 in front view becomes large, and it becomes difficult to make the rotating body 560 conspicuous. There is a profit.

  That is, in the present embodiment, by arranging the fastening portions 516b with the minimum number of parts in the lower bottom portion 518, the guide member 516 can be made thin while maintaining the effect of securing the arrangement width of the electrical wiring DK1. Thus, the effect of enhancing the presence of the rotating body 560 in front view can be achieved.

  Further, by setting the remaining fastening portion 516b as the fastening portion 516b far from the right end of the lowered bottom portion 518, it is possible to minimize the degree to which the arrangement width of the electrical wiring DK1 is reduced.

  The fastening portion 516b disposed in the lower bottom portion 518 includes a positioning pin 516c similarly to the fastening portion 516b disposed on the left side of the guide member 516 (see FIG. 30A), but the positioning pin 516c has already been fastened The electric wiring DK1 is disposed by the portion 516b at a position where the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 is not possible. That is, they are disposed on a straight line which is drawn from the deformed hole 517 and overlaps the fastening portion 516 b and on the opposite side of the deformed hole 517 with respect to the fastening portion 516 b.

  Thereby, the positioning pin 516c can be prevented from narrowing the arrangement range (arrangement width) of the electric wiring DK1. Therefore, the positioning pin 516c facilitates the arrangement when assembling the guide member 516 to the U-shaped metal plate 511. The wiring range (arrangement width) of the electric wiring DK1 can be ensured while securing the property.

  Referring back to FIG. The electric wiring DK1 reaching the right end of the lowered bottom portion 518 is curved upward along the plate left surface of the left and right fixed lid 514, and thereafter disposed between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lid 514 Be done.

  Left and right fixed lid 514 is extended to a position where it is disposed opposite to the front and rear upper and lower surfaces of U-shaped metal plate 511 along the outer shape of body plate portion 514a formed in a flat plate shape and body plate portion 514a. A space securing portion 514c which is formed to fill a corner formed by the extending frame portion 514b, the extending frame portion 514b, and the main body plate portion 514a and is recessed toward the main body plate portion 514a side from the extending frame portion 514b. And a positioning pin formed in a part of the space securing portion 514c and used for fastening with the U-shaped metal plate 511 and an insertion hole for fastening screw insertion fastened to the U-shaped metal plate 511 A fastening portion 514d and a jig hole 514e drilled in the main body plate portion 514a at front and rear positions of the fastening portion 514b are mainly provided.

  The space securing portion 514c is formed at a position abutted against the U-shaped metal plate 511 in the left-right direction, and thereby a thickness of the space securing portion 514c generated between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the main body plate portion 514a. The electrical wiring DK1 is laid in the gap between

  The fastening portion 514 d is disposed on the front side in the same manner as the fastening portion 516 b disposed in the lowered bottom portion 518. Thereby, the range in which the electric wiring DK1 is disposed can be secured on the rear side continuously from the lower bottom portion 518 to the left and right fixed lid 514.

  Here, by arranging the fastening portions 514 d and 516 b on the front side, it is possible to reduce the degree of decrease in the rendering performance with respect to the loosening of the fastening screw. For example, in the case where the fastening portions 514d and 516b are disposed on the rear side, when the fastening screw is loosened, the displacement with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 increases because it is the front portion that is easily viewed by the player. There is a risk of performance degradation.

  On the other hand, when the fastening screws of the fastening portions 514d and 516b disposed on the front side are loosened, the displacement with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 is increased at the rear side portion where the fastening screws are not disposed. Since the rear side portion is a portion which is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is difficult for the player to notice the loosening of the fastening screw. Therefore, the degree of decrease in the rendering performance can be reduced.

  In addition, since the positioning pins of the fastening portion 514d are disposed overlapping the upper and lower sides (longitudinal direction of the electrical wiring DK1) of the insertion hole, the degree to which the insertion hole and the positioning pin narrow the arrangement range of the electrical wiring DK1 is minimized. Can be reduced to

  When assembling the left and right fixed lids 514 to the U-shaped metal plate 511, the jig hole 514e causes the electrical wiring DK1 to be caught between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the space securing portion 514c (it will be crushed). In order to avoid the problem, it is an opening for inserting a jig (not shown) for adjusting the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 from the outside.

  From this point of view, the jig hole 514e becomes unnecessary after the assembling operation is completed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the jig holes 514e are formed at the left and right positions where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the jig holes 514e. It can prevent.

  The electric wiring DK1 disposed between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixing lid 514 is disposed inside the U-shaped metal plate 511 through the inner diameter side of the right fixing bush 522 of the both end fixing means 520. Ru. Each electric wire of the electric wiring DK1 disposed inside the U-shaped metal plate 511 is connected to the drive motor 541, the electric decoration board 543, and the detection sensor 547, whereby electricity can be supplied.

  Here, the electrical wiring DK1 passes not only through the inside of the right fixed bush 522 but also through the inside of the axial right main body portion 531, the axial left main body portion 535, and the posture fixing bush 571. Thus, the electrical wiring DK1 contacts the rotating portion of the rotating unit 500 (the rotating body 560, the rotating left plate 550, the motor gear 542 meshed with the rotating left plate 550, and the driven plate 575 of the rotating right cover 570). Can be physically prevented.

  Further, the electric wiring DK1 passes through the inside of the shaft right main body 531 disposed on the right side opposite to the left of the shaft left main body 535 to which the drive motor 541 is fastened and fixed, and to the inside of the U-shaped metal plate 511. An arc-shaped extension that is disposed and extends to the right along the outer shape of the protrusion fastening portion 537 and the shaft left main body portion 535 at a position opposite to the drive motor 541 with respect to the protrusion fastening portion 537 It is arrange | positioned between setting part 535a.

  Thus, the electrical wiring DK1 can be disposed apart from the drive motor 541, so that the electrical wiring DK1 can be prevented from becoming high temperature and being damaged by the heat generated from the drive motor 541. Further, this effect is produced by the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 with respect to the projecting fastening portion 537 as the fastening portion, and without adding a separate dedicated member for disposing the electrical wiring DK1 away from the drive motor 541. As it can be done, the product cost can be reduced.

  The upward and downward movement of the combined operation unit 402 of the first operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. In FIG. 32 to FIG. 34, the first operation unit 400 moving up and down is illustrated in time series. That is, in FIG. 32, the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated, and in FIG. 33, the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the middle position of the vertical movement width is illustrated. A state where 500 is arranged at the raised position is illustrated.

  32 (a) is a left side view of combined operation unit 402, FIG. 32 (b) is a front view of combined operation unit 402, and FIG. 32 (c) is a right side view of combined operation unit 402. It is. In FIG. 32 (a), the metal plate portion 432 is penetrated and the back side thereof is illustrated for easy understanding, and the outer shape of the metal plate portion 432 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 32 (c). The illustration of the right side member 468 is omitted.

  33 (a) is a left side view of the combined operation unit 402, FIG. 33 (b) is a front view of the combined operation unit 402, and FIG. 33 (c) is a right side of the combined operation unit 402. It is a front view. In FIG. 33 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the metal plate portion 432 is penetrated and its back side is illustrated, the outer shape of the metal plate portion 432 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 33 (c) The illustration of the right side member 468 is omitted.

  34 (a) is a left side view of the combined operation unit 402, FIG. 34 (b) is a front view of the combined operation unit 402, and FIG. 34 (c) is a right side of the combined operation unit 402. It is a front view. 34 (a), the metal plate portion 432 is penetrated and the back side is illustrated in FIG. 34 (a) for easy understanding, and the outer shape of the metal plate portion 432 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34 (c). The illustration of the right side member 468 is omitted.

  First, the operation of the transmission means 450 by the drive means 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 (a), 33 (a) and 34 (a). When the drive gear 441a rotates with the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 of the drive means 440, the transmission gear 451 engaged with the drive gear 441a, the intermediate gear 452 engaged with the transmission gear 451, and The rotating arm member 453 in which the gear portion 453a is engaged with the intermediate gear 452 is simultaneously rotated.

  When the drive gear 441a is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left in the state shown in FIG. 32 (a), the pivoting arm member 453 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the left, as shown in FIG. 34 (a). It is stopped at a position where it abuts on a rotation restricting portion 442 f extending leftward from the upper end portion of the partition plate portion 442 a of the member 442.

  Conversely, when the drive gear 441a is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the left side from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a), the pivoting arm member 453 rotates clockwise as viewed from the left side, as shown in FIG. 32 (a). By inserting the detection plate portion 453d into the detection sensor 442d, it is detected that the pivoting arm member 453 is disposed at the rotation end position (see FIG. 32A), and the drive motor 441 is driven. Stop control is performed.

  At the end position of this operation, the connecting member 454 connected to the rotating tip of the pivoting arm member 453 is allowed to move in the lateral direction of the through hole 416 a of the supporting means 410 (displacement of the supporting means 410 is permitted) Since the rotation of the pivoting arm member 453 is restricted by abutting in a direction perpendicular to the direction, it is possible to intentionally provide an additional abutting portion (for example, a portion corresponding to the rotation restricting portion 442f). I did not.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a), 33 (a) and 34 (a), the detection plate portion 453d is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the rotation arm member 453, and is detected The sensor 442 d is in a posture in which the detection groove overlaps with the arc, and the proximal end side of the detection groove is disposed radially outward with respect to the arc.

  As a result, the detection plate portion 453d can be detected by the detection sensor 442d, and detection is performed even when the rotation arm member 453 is rotated beyond the rotation end position (the position of FIG. 32A). It is possible to prevent the detection plate portion 453d from colliding with the proximal end side of the detection groove of the sensor 442d.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), since the fastening screw insertion hole of the end plate member 421 is disposed inside the notch of the metal plate 432 at the raised position of the rotation unit 500, the fastening screw is turned by a driver. be able to.

  That is, at the time of assembly, by arranging the rotation unit 500 at the raised position, the stacking means 420 and the support means 410 can be fixed, and at the time of maintenance, the rotation unit 500 is arranged at the raised position. The fixing of the stacking means 420 and the support means 410 can be released.

  The assembly order of the combined operation unit 402 and the rotation unit 500 of the first operation unit 400 will be described. In the description of the assembly order, FIGS. 23, 24, 25, 26, 30, 30A, and 31 will be referred to as appropriate.

  First, the rotation unit 500 is assembled. At that time, each configuration of the shaft configuration means 530 is assembled and integrated in a state where one end of the electric wiring DK1 corresponding to the drive motor 541, the electric decoration substrate 543 and the detection sensor 547 is connected. At this time, the other end side of the electrical wiring DK1 is drawn out through the wiring opening 533b (see FIGS. 25 and 30A).

  Next, the rotating left cover 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right cover 570 are assembled to the shaft forming means 530 and integrated. At this time, the other end side of the electrical wiring DK1 is drawn outside through the opening at the center of the posture fixing bush 571 (see FIGS. 25 and 30A).

  The distance between the left surface of the flanged gear 551 and the right surface of the posture fixing bush 571 is equal to that of the U-shaped metal plate 511 in a state where the rotating left cover 550, the rotating body 560 and the rotating right cover 570 are integrated. It is configured to be slightly shorter than the distance between oppositely disposed plate portions as the tip end portion.

  Therefore, an assembly in which the rotating left lid 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right lid 570 are integrated can be disposed between the plate portions disposed opposite to each other as the tip of the U-shaped metal plate 511. At this time, the protruding fastening portion 532 is disposed in alignment with the position of the circular hole 513a.

  Next, both end fixing means 520 are fitted from the left and right outer sides of the U-shaped metal plate 511. At this time, the other end side of the electrical wiring DK1 is drawn outside through the central opening of the right fixing bush 522 (see FIG. 30A).

  The shapes of the both end fixing means 520 and the U-shaped metal plate 511 are such that the rotation of the both end fixing means 520 with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 can be restricted (for example, concavo-convex fitting). The shape of the means 530 is a shape that can restrict the rotation of the shaft forming means 530 with respect to the fixing means 520 at both ends (for example, fitting in a D-shaped cross section). Therefore, the rotation of the shaft forming means 530 with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 can be restricted (see FIG. 25).

  The shaft forming means 530 can be fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511 by inserting the fastening screw through the insertion hole 523 and screwing the fastening screw into the projecting fastening portion 532. As a result, the U-shaped metal plate 511, both end fixing means 520, the shaft forming means 530, the rotating left cover 550, the rotating body 560 and the rotating right cover 570 can be integrated. Of the both end fixing means 520, the left fixing bush 521 is prevented from coming off by the left and right fixing lid 514, and the arrangement of the fastening screw is omitted.

  Next, the left and right fixed lid 514 and the guide member 516 are fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511. At this time, the other end side of the electrical wiring DK1 is drawn downward through the deformed hole 517 of the guide member 516 (see FIG. 30A).

  In order to narrow the gap between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lid 514, a plurality of electric wires DK1 disposed between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lid 514 are formed. It is preferable to distribute the wires in the front and back direction (see FIG. 31 (b)).

  In the assembling operation of the present embodiment, the left and right fixed lids 514 are adjusted while adjusting the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 by inserting a dedicated jig (rod, string or special shaped jig) through the jig hole 514e. The U-shaped metal plate 511 can be assembled. As a result, it is possible to reduce the degree of difficulty in the process of assembling the plurality of electric wires constituting the electric wiring DK1 while dispersing and arranging the electric wires DK1.

  When the guide member 516 is fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511, the electric wire DK1 naturally functions as a fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b by assembling the guide member 516 to the U-shaped metal plate 511 while pulling the electric wire DK1 downward. (See FIG. 31 (c)). As a result, the degree of difficulty of the process of assembling while arranging the electrical wiring DK1 at an appropriate position can be reduced.

  When assembling the rotation unit 500 integrally assembled in the above-described procedure to the support means 410, it is to be noted that the other end side of the electrical wiring DK1 is brought downward through the deformed hole 413. A spiral tube is wound around the electrical wiring DK1 that has come out under the deformed hole 413.

  Of the combined operation unit 402 of the first operation unit 400, the configuration excluding the wiring assistance means 460 can be assembled separately from the rotation unit 500, so it is integrally assembled before the rotation unit 500 is assembled, After fixing the rotation unit 500 to the support means 410 in the state, the other end side of the electric wiring DK1 is fixed and arranged.

  That is, the electric wiring DK1 is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band inserted into the forming portion 411a of the support means 410, and is fixed to the lower extending portion 519 of the guide member 516 in the same manner. The lower part of the support column portion 464 is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band inserted into the wire support portion 465, and is passed through the opening 442e of the divided base member 442 to the rear side (see FIG. 23).

  By fastening and fixing the left side member 461 to the divided base member 442 in a state where the electric wiring DK1 passes through the opening 442e, the electric wiring DK1 can be disposed in the gap between the partition plate portion 442a and the left side member 461 . According to this assembling method, the electric wiring DK1 is formed in the gap narrower than the size of the connector at the tip of the electric wiring DK1 as compared with the case where the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 is determined in the state where the left side member 461 is fixed to the divided base member 442 Therefore, the gap between the partition plate portion 442a and the left side member 461 can be designed to be narrow.

  Thereafter, by fastening and fixing the right side member 468 to the left side member 461, the assembly of the combined operation unit 402 of the first operation unit 400 can be completed. As described above, according to the present embodiment in which the wiring auxiliary means 460 is not formed integrally but formed separately by the left side member 461 and the right side member 468, the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed inside the wiring auxiliary means 460. The work efficiency of the work to be done can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32 (b), FIG. 32 (c), FIG. 33 (b), FIG. 33 (c), FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. The relationship among DK1, the support means 410 for supporting the electrical wiring DK1, and the guide member 516 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, at the lowered position of the rotation unit 500, the front flat portion 414 of the support means 410 abuts on the upper end portion of the left side member 461 of the wiring auxiliary means 460 and is supported downward. That is, the wiring auxiliary means 460 also functions as a means for supporting the rotation unit 500.

  In other words, while adopting a configuration in which only the left side portion of the rotating unit 500 is supported by the stacking means 420 and the guiding means 430 (see FIG. 23), only the left and right of the rotating unit 500 are disposed at the lowered position. The rotating unit 500 can be supported on both sides.

  Thereby, the upper limit value of the rotational speed of the rotating body 560 in the state where the wobbling of the rotating unit 500 falls within the allowable range is determined in another state (for example, the rotating unit 500 It can be raised as compared with the state of being placed at the raised position).

  As shown in FIG. 32C, at the lowered position of the rotation unit 500, the lower end portion of the front hanging portion 414 abuts on the front upper end portion of the belt-like extension portion 463 of the wiring assistance means 460. As a result, the opening above the wiring assisting means 460 can be shielded against the line of sight of the player (viewed obliquely downward). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the electric wiring DK1 accommodated in the wiring auxiliary unit 460 in the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position.

  The electrical wiring DK1 is fixed to the forming portion 411a (see FIG. 23) by a fixing member such as a binding band, and is fixed to the lower end portion of the lower extending portion 519 below by a fixing member such as a binding band and hangs downward A portion is supported (housed) inside the wiring aid 460.

  The length of the electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 32C) accommodated inside the wiring auxiliary means 460 is the length of the strip extending portion 463 and the support post 464 in the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the raised position. It is designed with such a length that the portion disposed between them floats (see FIG. 34 (c)).

  Further, the shape of the belt-like extension part 463 is designed with such a length that the electric wiring DK1 disposed on the substantially arc shape on the front side of the functional curved surface 463a reaches the lower extension part 519 without excessive slack. (See FIG. 32 (a)).

  Thus, by designing the electrical wiring DK1 with a sufficient length so as not to put a burden on the electrical wiring DK1, the electrical wiring DK1 can be arranged with ample margin inside the wiring auxiliary means 460. In addition, since the electrical wiring DK1 reaches the downward extending portion 519 without excessive loosening, the occurrence of a situation where the electrical wiring DK1 is pinched between the belt-like extending portion 463 and the front hanging portion 414 is prevented. be able to.

  The spiral tube (not shown) wound around the electrical wiring DK1 is formed of a flexible silicon resin, but due to its shape, it is slightly more rigid than the electrical wiring. Therefore, it is possible to suppress variation in displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 caused by the up and down operation of the rotation unit 500.

  Further, since the electrical wiring DK1 can be supported by the rigidity of the spiral tube (the electrical wiring DK1 can be supported by the spiral tube), the electrical wiring DK1 is suspended from the wiring support portion 465 and the lower extending portion 519 Even in the state where the electric wiring DK1 can be prevented from hanging down by its own weight, the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 can be stabilized.

  The electric wiring DK1 supported inside the wiring auxiliary means 460 is fixed to the wiring support portion 465 by a fixing member such as a binding band, and is guided backward from the opening 442e through between the left side member 461 and the partition plate portion 442a. (See FIG. 23). That is, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is supported and suspended by the lower extension portion 519 and the wiring support portion 465.

  Of the lower extending portion 519 and the wiring support portion 465, the wiring support portion 465 is fixed, the lower extending portion 519 is configured to be vertically movable, and the lower extending portion 519 side (front side) is Since the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 is easily dispersed, the space on the upper side of the strip-like extending portion 463 can be largely secured on the lower extending portion 519 side (front side).

  Specifically, the electric wiring DK1 is disposed by lowering the shape on the front side downward as compared to the shape on the rear side and forming an arc shape having a center on the inner side (upper side) of the wiring auxiliary means 460. A large space is available.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the pivoting arm member 453 is disposed on the left side of the combined operation unit 402, the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed on the right side of the combined operation unit 402, and the arrangement range is the partition plate portion 442a. It is divided by

  Here, the partition plate portion 442a is an essential component as a portion for supporting the drive motor 441 and the transmission means 450. That is, since the arrangement range of the rotating arm member 453 and the electric wiring DK1 can be divided without adding a dedicated member, the material cost can be reduced while the rotating arm member 453 and the electric wiring DK1 Interference can be avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 34C, at the raised position of the rotation unit 500, the extending direction of the extending arm 453b of the pivoting arm member 453 is the vertical direction starting from the rotation axis, so the through elongated hole 416a Crosses at right angles in the left-right direction with respect to the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction). In other words, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pivoting arm member 453 and the center of the connecting member 454 is in the vertical direction, and intersects perpendicularly with the longitudinal direction (longitudinal direction) of the through elongated hole 416a in the lateral direction. Do.

  Thereby, the weight of the rotation unit 500 is directed to the rotation axis of the rotation arm member 453, and it is possible to prevent the weight from being loaded in the rotation direction of the rotation arm member 453 (so-called dead point). Even if the driving force of the drive motor 441 is released in the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the raised position, the vertical position of the rotation unit 500 can be maintained. Thereby, the drive time of the drive motor 441 can be reduced, and the heat generation can be easily suppressed.

  Note that the extending direction of the extending arm portion 453b of the pivoting arm member 453 and the penetrating elongated hole 416a intersect at right angles in the left-right direction even when the rotating unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position. (See FIG. 32 (a)).

  Thereby, the upward load in the case of the bound displacement (rebound displacement) after the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position is directed to the rotation axis of the pivot arm 453, and the load of the pivot arm 453 is Since it can be prevented from being loaded in the rotational direction (so-called effect of the dead center occurs), even if the rotating unit 500 is moved to the lowered position at high speed, the bound displacement (rebound displacement) Can be easily prevented.

  Therefore, it is possible to partially eliminate the need for the drive motor 441 to generate a load for preventing the bound displacement (rebound displacement), so that the drive time of the drive motor 441 can be reduced, which makes it easy to suppress the heat generation. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 34C, in the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the raised position, the connecting member 454 of the pivoting arm member 453 is a rear end portion of the through elongated hole 416a, that is, a columnar member on the rear side. It is disposed at a position where it overlaps with 431 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the supporting force via the pivoting arm member 453 is concentrated on the rear side of the support means 410, and the support means 410 and the front side portion of the rotation unit 500 are easily wobbled.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the columnar member 431 on the front side is configured to support the stacking means 420 via the guide cylindrical portion 423 (see FIG. 23). As a result, the area (surface area) on which the stacking means 420 is supported by the columnar members 431 can be increased, so that the wobbling of the front side of the stacking means 420, the support means 410 and the rotation unit 500 can be suppressed.

  The displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 when the rotation unit 500 moves from the raised position to the lowered position will be described. As shown in FIG. 34C, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided from the lower side of the support column 464 to the upper side through the front side, and is fixed to the lower extension 519.

  Since the lower extending portion 519 is disposed on the front side relative to the support post 464 as shown in FIG. 34C, the portion (extra portion) hanging down from the lower extending portion 519 of the electrical wiring DK1 is It is disposed on the front side of the support column 464.

  The extra portion of the electrical wiring DK1 is displaced up and down as the lower extending portion 519 moves up and down. For example, when the lower extending portion 519 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 34C, the excess portion of the electrical wiring DK1 similarly descends and starts to abut on the functional curved surface 463a of the strip extending portion 463 (see FIG. See FIG. 33 (c)).

  Of the electrical wiring DK1, the length of the electrical wiring DK1 accommodated in the wiring auxiliary means 460 increases and the diameter of the arc formed by the electrical wiring DK1 increases as the lower extending portion 519 approaches the disposition at the lowering position of the rotation unit 500. .

  In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is displaced to the front side by the load received from the functional curved surface 463a, but as a countermeasure, the upper region of the strip-like extended portion 463 is the front compared to the back side. Since the side is made larger, the load given to the electrical wiring DK1 from the strip-like extending portion 463 can be reduced.

  Further, while the electric wiring DK1 (electric wiring DK1 near the bottom of the wiring auxiliary means 460) near the functional curved surface 463a to which a load is given by the contact between the electric wiring DK1 and the functional curved surface 463a is moved toward the front, Before coming into contact with the surface 463a, the electrical wiring DK1 hangs down from the lower extending portion 519 disposed at a position far from the front end of the wiring auxiliary means 460, whereby the wiring auxiliary means 460 is arranged. Can be prevented from sticking out to the front side from the front side end of the

  Thus, as in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the front hanging portion 414 and the wiring auxiliary unit 460 abut each other (the opening of the wiring auxiliary unit 460 is partially closed) in the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position. While being adopted (see FIG. 32C), the electrical wiring DK1 can be prevented from being pinched by the contact portion (closed portion).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the function bending portion 463a is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front side, so that the main displacement direction of the electrical wiring DK1 becomes the front-rear direction. Can be Thereby, the width in the lateral direction in which the displacement in the electric wiring DK1 is hard to occur is short (narrow), and the width in the longitudinal direction in which the displacement in the electric wiring DK1 tends to occur is wide (wide) can do.

  By partially restricting the direction of displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 and making it possible to select a shape having a narrow width in the left-right direction as the shape of the wiring auxiliary means 460, the left-right width of the combined operation unit 402 can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even in the configuration in which the plurality of combined operation units 402 are arranged side by side (see FIG. 19) as in the present embodiment, the shape of the wiring auxiliary means 460 having an auxiliary role of accommodating the electric wiring DK1 is limited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the rotation unit 500 having a leading role visually recognized by the player as a rendering device from being reduced.

  First, for the positional deviation of the electrical wiring DK1 in the left-right direction, a gap is secured between the upper and lower ends of the wiring auxiliary means 460 and the support means 410 (see FIG. 32C). It is possible to avoid that the load of sandwiching is applied to the electrical wiring DK1.

  Second, the opposing plate 462 is provided with an inclined portion 462a which inclines in the direction away from the right side member 468 toward the upper side at the upper end thereof, and the opposing plate 462 right side toward the upper side The electric wiring DK1 is configured to be easily slipped into the wiring auxiliary means 460 by providing the inclined portion 468a inclined in the direction away from the wiring.

  That is, since the inclined portions 462a and 468a are formed in a reverse C shape in the front view in which the opening width becomes longer as the electric wiring DK1 is approached, the electric wiring DK1 is misaligned in either the left or right direction. Even in this case, the electrical wiring DK1 can be easily guided to the inside of the wiring auxiliary means 460. This makes it easy to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the electrical wiring DK1 is caught on the upper edge of the wiring auxiliary means 460 and is not guided by the wiring auxiliary means 460 and is sandwiched between the support means 410 and the wiring auxiliary means 460. can do.

  Thirdly, the left and right positions of the wiring support portion 465 and the lower extending portion 519 which fix the electric wiring DK1 so as to be suspended are designed to match (see FIGS. 33B and 34B). . That is, by disposing the position to fix the electric wiring DK1 on the same plane orthogonal to the left-right direction, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the electric wiring DK1 in the left-right direction accompanying the vertical displacement of the rotation unit 500.

  An example of the operation effect using the first operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a), 35 (b), 35 (c), 35 (d), 35 (e) and 35 (f) show the third symbol display device 81 and the first operation unit 400. It is a front view of the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the 1st operation unit 400 which are shown typically.

  35 (a), 35 (b), 35 (c) and 35 (d), an example of the change of the first operation unit 400 during the game is illustrated in time series, and FIGS. 35 (e) and 35 (e) In (f) of FIG. 35, an example of the effect of executing notification of different contents by interlocking the plurality of rotation units 500 is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, the lighting or extinguishing of the rotation unit 500 is controlled to correspond to the number of holding balls of the fluctuation associated with entering the first winning opening 64 (or the second winning opening 640, the through gate 67). That is, every time there is a ball entering the first winning opening 64 (or the second winning opening 640, the through gate 67) before the currently ongoing fluctuation stops (every time the number of holding balls increases), the left end The rotation unit 500 is lighted sequentially (the LED member 544 is lighted). That is, in FIG. 35 (a), a state in which the number of holding balls is three is illustrated.

  The luminescent color of the rotating unit 500 can be changed according to the luminescent color of the LED member 544, and the difference in the luminescent color causes the jackpot expectation of the corresponding fluctuation (or the small hit expectation, the hit expectation, the player The difference in the expected degree of profit) may be reported.

  The plurality of LED members 544 are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can perform emission effects of multiple colors with a small number of LEDs.

  When the currently ongoing fluctuation is stopped, the leftmost rotation unit 500 is turned off (see FIG. 35B), and the correspondence of the hold display shifts one by one to the left (see FIG. 35C).

  Since the rotation unit 500 is displaceable between the raised position and the lowered position as described above, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), a state in which a part of the third symbol display device 81 is hidden in the raised position. Can be controlled to rotate at

  Thereby, the attention power to the rotation unit 500 can be improved. In addition, a decorative pattern disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 and a measure of jackpot expectation (or small hit expectation, hit expectation, expectation of profit obtained by the player) of the corresponding variation. By matching and controlling, it is possible to improve the attentional power to the rotation unit 500.

  For example, in FIG. 35 (b), after the third rotation unit 500 from the left is lifted and rotated, the decorative pattern of “?” Is visually recognized by the player by arranging the surface component 560b on the front side. Be done. In this way, the player is notified that the jackpot expectation (or the small hit expectation, the hit expectation, the expectation of the profit obtained by the player) of the change is unknown to the player, and the player's interest is drawn be able to.

  In addition, the aspect at the time of attracting interest is not restricted to this. For example, the rotation of the rotating body 560 may be continued, or the LED member 544 may be blinked at high speed.

  Thereafter, as a result of the correspondence of the reserve display being shifted to the left one by one, the face constituting member 560a is disposed on the front side in the second rotation unit 500 from the left, so that the decorative pattern of "Δ" Be done. Control is performed so that the jackpot expectation degree (or the small hitting expectation degree, the expectation degree per hit, the expectation degree of the profit obtained by the player) is higher in the decoration pattern of "△" compared to the decoration pattern of "○" In this case, it is possible to improve the power of paying attention to the fluctuation corresponding to the second rotation unit 500 from the left.

  In addition, the notification of the jackpot expectation degree (or the small hitting expectation degree, the hit expectation degree, the expectation degree of the profit obtained by the player) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the number of holding balls. You may carry out by changing a color or a form. Further, control may be performed to associate the hold display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the state of the rotation unit 500. Further, an effect may be adopted in which a time difference is provided between the change of the hold display and the change of the state of the rotation unit 500.

  As shown in FIG. 35C, as a result of the correspondence of the hold display shifting to the left one by one, the third rotation unit 500 from the left turns off and is displaced to the lowered position. This displacement makes it possible to visually recognize the hidden range of the third symbol display device 81, but by drawing a display (for example, a display indicating "coin") which enhances the player's expectation in this range, the rotation is performed. The power of attention to the third symbol display device 81 after the unit 300 is displaced to the lowered position can be improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, not only the attention of the player is improved by controlling the rotation unit 500 in association with the fluctuation of the symbols and the number of balls held, but also the third symbol display device 81 By partially concealing the display area, the third symbol display device 81 can function as a blindfold when changing the display.

  At this time, attention is paid to the rotation unit 500 disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 as an auxiliary effect of improving the attention force to the rotation unit 500 for partially hiding the third symbol display device 81. By moving the rotating unit 500 out (see FIG. 35 (c)) from the state shown in FIG. 35 (b), it is possible to leave the line of sight of the player facing the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third symbol display device 81, so that the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  When the correspondence of the hold display shifts to the left from the state shown in FIG. 35 (c) and the decorative pattern of “Δ” is illustrated in FIG. 35 (c), the variation corresponding to the hold is a big hit The characters “HIT!” Are arranged by arranging the plurality of rotating bodies 560 in the raised position as shown in FIG. 35 (d) before the fluctuation stops and arranging the surface component 560c on the front side. It is possible to make the player visually recognize strings (such as a jackpot, a character string that reminds the player of changing to a state in which the player can obtain some benefit).

  In this case, it is preferable to turn on the LED member 544 regardless of the number of holding balls. As a result, it is possible to cause the rotation unit 500 to emit light brightly, and to perform an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to configure an effect of causing the plurality of rotating bodies 560 to be viewed alone and an effect of causing the plurality of rotating bodies 560 to be viewed together. Here, the effect of making the plurality of rotating bodies 560 collectively visible is not limited to the aspect shown in FIG. 35 (d), and various aspects are exemplified.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), the third rotating body 560 from the left is disposed at the lowered position, and the remaining rotating bodies 560 are disposed at the raised position, whereby the character string “HI! Can be made to be visible to the player).

  By controlling the state shown in FIG. 35E to occur periodically in the standby state before the player starts playing a game, the player's interest can be attracted.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), the character string "HIT?" Can be made to be recognized by the player if only the rotary member 560 at the right end faces the front side. .

  In this case, it is possible to draw the player's interest from the expectation that it will change to "HIT!" Also, it may be directed as such. That is, from the state of FIG. 35 (f), the rotating body 560 at the right end may be controlled to be rotated, and control may be made to change to the state of FIG. 35 (d).

  36A and 36B are left side views of the detection sensor 547 and the driven plate 575 of the rotating right cover 570. 36A shows a state in which the detection sensor 547 is disposed at one end (the front end in FIG. 36A) of the non-formation range of the detection target 577, and FIG. , A state in which the detection sensor 547 is disposed at the end (rear end in FIG. 36B) opposite to the non-formation range of the detection target 577 is illustrated.

  The states shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b) both indicate a state of waiting for rotation (stopped state). That is, in FIG. 36A, the angle α1 of the non-formation range of the detection portion 577 from the time when the detection portion 577 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 during rotation of the rotating body 560 (in this embodiment, A state in which the drive motor 541 is stopped by rotating it by an angle (30 degrees in the present embodiment) by half of 60 degrees is illustrated, and in FIG. 36 (b), the rotating body 560 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view. A state is shown in which the drive motor 541 is stopped immediately after the detected portion 577 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 in a state in which the drive motor 541 is stopped.

  The angular difference between the states shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b) depends on the angle of the non-formed portion of the detected portion 577. In the present embodiment, the detection portion 577 is formed such that the angle α1 of the non-formation portion is 60 degrees, and the angle difference between the states shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b) is about 45 degrees. Be done.

  This angle difference is designed in correspondence with the direction of the player's line of sight, which changes as the rotating unit 500 moves up and down. That is, when the rotating unit 500 is disposed at the raised position, the line of sight of the player looking at the rotating unit 500 is directed substantially horizontally, and therefore the rotating body 560 is rotated when it is stopped in the posture shown in FIG. The decorative pattern of the body 560 can be easily shown, and the effect of the rotating body 560 can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position, the line of sight of the player looking at the rotation unit 500 looks down, so it is better to stop the rotation body 560 in the posture shown in FIG. The decorative pattern of the rotating body 560 can be easily shown, and the rendering effect of the rotating body 560 can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotating unit 500 is disposed at the rising position by configuring the stop posture of the rotating unit 500 in a plurality of types from the relationship with the line of sight of the player viewing the rotating unit 500. The rotating body 560 can be stopped in a posture in which the decorative pattern of the rotating body 560 can be easily shown to the player regardless of whether it is disposed at the lowered position.

  It should be noted that the correspondence between the detection sensor 547 and the detected portion 577 differs between the state shown in FIG. 36A and the state shown in FIG. This is due to the difference in the rotational speed of the rotating body 560).

  That is, the state shown in FIG. 36A is the stop position in the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the raised position, but in the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the raised position, the player's attention is rotated Since the units are sufficiently gathered in the unit 500, it is possible to improve the player's interest over a long period of time by slowing down the rotational speed of the rotating body 560 and stopping it slowly.

  For example, the change from the state shown in FIG. 35 (f) to the state shown in FIG. 35 (d) can be produced by rotating the rotating body 560 slowly to prolong the period during which the player's sense of expectation increases. The power of attention of the rotating body 560 can be maintained. Therefore, after the position is determined by the detection sensor 547, the rotation of the rotating body 560 is performed even if the rotation is stopped after rotating the half angle (about 30 degrees in this embodiment) of the non-formation range of the detection target 577. The possibility of the stop posture being shifted is low, and the rotating body 560 can be easily stopped in the posture shown in FIG. 36 (a).

  According to this control mode, the rotating body 560 can be stopped in the attitude shown in FIG. 36A in the same control mode regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating body 560. Therefore, since the control mode to stop after the forward rotation and the control mode to stop after the reverse rotation can be optionally selected, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the operation mode up to the stop of the rotating body 560. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest.

  The state shown in FIG. 36 (b) is the stop position when the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position, but in the state where the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position, the player's attention is given to the rotation unit 500. In many cases, it is easy to improve the player's interest if the rotational speed of the rotating body 560 is increased.

  In the case of rotation at high speed, after the position is determined by the detection sensor 547, control is performed to stop after rotating an angle (about 30 degrees in the present embodiment) of the non-formation range of the detected portion 577. In this case, the stop position of the rotating body 560 may shift. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), by stopping the drive motor 541 immediately after the detected portion 577 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 547, the shift of the stop position of the rotating body 560 can be suppressed. .

  The rotation control of the rotation unit 500 is stopped by rotating the rotation unit 500 at rotation angles (90 degrees, 180 degrees, 270 degrees) set at intervals of 90 degrees from the above-described plurality of types of stop positions. It is possible to stop in a posture in which the player visually recognizes one of the faces of ~ 560d.

  As described above, the postures shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B correspond to changes in the player's line of sight, but the drive motor 541 (FIG. It can be avoided that the player sees (see Reference).

  That is, since the drive motor 541 is disposed inside the rotating body 560, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the rotating body 560 regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight, and the drive motor 541 is viewed by the player Can be prevented.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), in the rotation unit 500, a configuration for detecting the angle of the rotating body 560 is disposed inside the rotating body 560. Therefore, a decorative pattern can be applied to most of the outer portion of the rotating body 560, and the effect of the rotating body 560 can be improved.

  In addition, a layout of a blindfold (a configuration for preventing the configuration for detecting the angle from being visually recognized) which may be required when the configuration for detecting the angle is arranged outside the rotating body 560. The rotary body 560 can be configured to be rotatable in one or more rotations while omitting the installation.

  FIGS. 37 and 38 are front perspective views of the second operation unit 700, and FIGS. 39 and 40 are rear perspective views of the second operation unit 700. FIGS. 37 and 39 illustrate the standby state of the second operation unit 700 in which the displacement base member 720 and the rendering means 780 are disposed at the standby position (rising end position), and in FIGS. 38 and 40, the displacement base member 720. And the state where the production means 780 is arrange | positioned in the overhanging position (falling end position) which overhangs the front of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is shown in figure.

  The second operation unit 700 is characterized in that each movable portion is displaced so as to reduce the amount of displacement of the electric wiring DK2, DK3 guided to each movable portion for electric supply, and the coil spring SP1 is visible in front view A spring cover SC1 is provided so as not to be concealed, and the spring cover SC1 has a feature of entering into the displacement base member 720 and the rendering means 780, which will be described later in detail. In addition, coil spring SP1 is illustrated in the square pole shape which curved typically.

  FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded back perspective view of the second operation unit 700. 43 is an exploded front perspective view of the fixed base member 701, the displacement base member 720, the drive means 730, the transmission means 740 and the biasing means 750, and FIG. 44 is a fixed base member 701, the displacement base member 720, FIG. 17 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive means 730, the transmission means 740 and the biasing means 750. That is, a part of FIG. 41 is enlarged in FIG. 43, and a part of FIG. 42 is enlarged in FIG.

  FIG. 45 is an exploded front perspective view of the supported means 760L, 760R and the connecting means 770, and FIG. 46 is an exploded rear perspective view of the supported means 760L, 760R and the connecting means 770. That is, a part of FIG. 41 is enlarged in FIG. 45, and a part of FIG. 42 is enlarged in FIG.

  FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rendering means 780, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering means 780. That is, a part of FIG. 41 is enlarged in FIG. 47, and a part of FIG. 42 is enlarged in FIG.

  FIG. 49 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 in a plane extending horizontally through the columnar fastening portion 705c of the support means 705. Note that FIG. 37 to FIG. 40 will be appropriately referred to in the description of FIG. 41 to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, the second operation unit 700 is disposed on the front side with respect to the left and right long fixed base members 701 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310 and the base members 701. Generated from a displacement base member 720 configured to be vertically displaceable with respect to the fixed base member 701, a drive means 730 for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement base member 720, and the drive means 730 A transmission means 740 configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force to the displacement base member 720, an urging means 750 for applying an upward biasing force to the displacement base member 720, and a pair of right and left disposed on the displacement base member 720 A shaft support means 760L, 760R rotatably supported by the end on the center side, and the other ends (right and left outer sides) of the shaft support means 760L, 760R Portion) and a pair of connecting means 770 for connecting the left and right ends of the fixed base member 701 mainly includes a presentation unit 780 for the purpose of decoration in fastening fixed front view on the front side of the displacement base member 720.

  The fixed base member 701 is formed of a synthetic resin material, and has a main plate portion 702 which is formed in the form of a long plate on the left and right, and is protruded in a bar shape to the front side from the main plate portion 702 A plurality of cover support projections 703 which are formed so as to be able to fasten and fix a spring cover SC1 at the tip, and a spring support section 704 which extends from the main body plate section 702 to the front side above the cover support projections 703 at the left end; A support means 705 for supporting gear members such as the transmission gear 734 for driving force transmission and the end gear 745, and a portion for pivotally supporting a rotation arm member 743 of the transmission means 740. A circular overhang portion 708 to be protruded, a metal slide rail 711 to which a plate on the back side is fixed to the left and right center portion of the main body plate portion 702 in a posture capable of sliding up and down A pair of cylindrical overhanging portions 714 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a front view from the raised position, and a pair of left and right upper end stoppers juxtaposed to the cylindrical overhanging portions 714 above the cylindrical overhanging portions 714 717 and a pair of left and right end lower stoppers formed with a plane along the radial direction of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 on the rear side of the longitudinal position at which the connecting means 770 of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 is supported. 719 mainly.

  The support means 705 is provided in a columnar shape having a diameter slightly shorter than the opening of the transmission gear 734 from the plate back surface of the fixed base member 701, and has a columnar fastening portion 705a having a female screw formed at its tip. An annular recessed portion 705b, which is recessed in a double annular shape from the front of the plate, and a cylindrical protrusion from the plate front of the fixed base member 701 at the center position of the annular recessed portion 705b The inner circumferential surface of the outermost periphery of the columnar fastening portion 705c in which the second portion is formed, the plurality of protruding portions 705d formed as protrusions extending in the front-rear direction on the side surface of the annular recessed portion 705b, and the annular recessed portion 705b And a gear opening 705e to be bored in the main body.

  The annular recessed portion 705 b is formed to have a diameter and a width in which the annular portion (the annular portion in which the gear is formed on the outer periphery) of the end gear 745 can be disposed. The end gear 745 is rotatably supported by the fastening screw inserted into the opening formed at the center of the end gear 745 being screwed into the columnar fastening portion 705c.

  The protruding portions 705 d are disposed at eight locations in 45 degree increments, and are formed with a protruding height such that the tip end can abut on the inner periphery of the annular portion of the end gear 745. Thereby, the annular portion and the annular recessed portion of the end gear 745 are maintained while maintaining the function (stabilization of the axially supported state) of stabilizing the rotation shaft of the end gear 745 as compared with the case where the circles are fitted. The contact area with 705 b can be reduced. Thus, the driving force required to rotate the end gear 745 can be reduced.

  The engagement opening 705e is formed to extend over the inner circumference of the annular recess 705b and the bottom on the back side. For the rear side bottom portion, at least an opening is formed at a position overlapping with a circle (a circle of the outermost diameter of the transmission gear 734) centered on the columnar fastening portion 705a in rear view. Thus, the transmission gear 734 can be pivotally supported by the columnar fastening portion 705a in a state in which the transmission gear 734 is extended to the inside (the inner diameter side of the annular recessed portion 705b) of the engagement opening 705e.

  In this embodiment, the gear tooth portion of the transmission gear 734 protruding to the inner diameter side of the annular recessed portion 705b through the toothing opening 705e and the gear tooth portion of the end gear 745 mesh with each other. As a result, the transmission gear 734 is attached to the fixed base member 701 from the back side and pivotally supported, while the end gear 745 is attached to the fixed base member 701 from the front side and pivotally supported. The driving force can be transmitted by meshing transmission between the transmission gear 734 and the end gear 745.

  The meshing opening 705e is formed only at a portion necessary for projecting the transmission gear 734 to the inner diameter side of the annular recessed portion 705b, and the other portion is not formed an opening. Thus, the strength of the fixed base member 701 in the vicinity of the support means 705 can be prevented from being excessively insufficient.

  The circular overhanging portion 708 includes a plurality of positioning projecting pins 709 projecting from the front end surface, and a plurality of protrusions 710 projecting radially outward over the projecting length.

  The protrusion 710 is disposed between the pivoting arm member 743 and the circular overhanging portion 708 and functions to reduce the contact area between the pivoting arm member 743 and the circular overhanging portion 708. In this case, since it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance of the shaft support portion which tends to be a problem when the circular overhanging portion 708 is configured to have a large diameter, it is possible to stabilize the shaft support state of the rotating arm member 743. The frictional resistance caused by the displacement of the moving arm member 743 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress the driving force required to displace the second operation unit 700.

  The metal slide rail 711 has a plurality of metal plates stacked in front and rear, and the metal plate at the front end is connected and fixed to the displacement base member 720. That is, the displacement base member 720 is guided by the metal slide rail 711 so as to be displaced in the vertical direction.

  The cylindrical overhanging portion 714 is a portion rotatably supporting the connecting means 770 by the outer peripheral shape being circular in a front view, the opening 714a penetrating in the longitudinal direction, and the front side end from the front side end It has a plurality of projecting pins 715 for projecting in a projecting manner, and a plurality of fastening portions 716 which are internally threaded at the front end in a portion where the projecting pins 715 are not projected.

  The opening 714a is a passing path of the electrical wiring DK2. That is, the electric wiring DK2 is guided to the front side through the opening 714a, and is fixed by fastening a wiring fastening member such as a binding band to the fixing shape portion 718 at the front end of the left and right end upper stoppers 717. .

  In the present embodiment, the fixing shape portion 718 having a shape through which the binding band can be formed is formed so as to project from the front end surface of the left and right end upper stoppers 717 among the left and right end upper stoppers 717. The fixing shape portion 718 is not formed on the right and left end upper stoppers 717.

  In this manner, of the left and right end upper stoppers 717, the fixing shape portion 718 is formed only on the left side to which the electrical wiring DK2 is guided, and the formation on the opposite side is omitted to simplify the shape of the fixed base member 701. Can be In addition, by not forming the fixing shape portion 718 at unnecessary places, the working efficiency of the assembly worker can be improved.

  Since the openings 714a are disposed in a pair on the left and right sides, the electric wiring DK2 can be guided to the front side at both left and right ends, but in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is guided only through the opening 714a on the left side The electric wiring DK2 is not disposed in the opening 714a on the right side.

  As a result, there is no need to design the right connecting means 770 pivotally supported by the right cylindrical overhanging portion 714 and the right cylindrical overhanging portion 714 in consideration of the relationship with the electrical wiring DK2, and therefore the right cylinder The design freedom of the configuration of the overhanging portion 714, the connection means 770 on the right side, and the periphery thereof can be improved.

  Regardless of this, the electric wiring DK2 may be passed to the front side from both the left and right openings 714a and guided to the left and right supported means 760L and 760R. In this case, the load applied to the supported means 760L, 760R through the electrical wiring DK2 can be easily made the same at the left and right, so that the displacement of the supported means 760L, 760R driven by the displacement of the displacement base member 720 can be It is easy to make it symmetrical.

  The protruding pin 715 and the fastening portion 716 are surfaces forming the shape of the opening 714a, and a circle formed by connecting surfaces on which neither the projecting pin 715 nor the fastening portion 716 is disposed (the circumscribed circle of the opening 714a) It is formed to project toward the center of the That is, the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 is different from the outer peripheral shape (circular shape), and is a shape in which circles are recessed toward the central axis at a plurality of places on the circumference.

  Here, for example, when the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhang portion 714 is a perfect circular shape, the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 may be reduced. That is, since the electric wiring DK2 inserted into the opening 714a is connected to the electric decoration substrate 764 of the axially supported means 760L, there is a possibility of displacement in accordance with the displacement of the axially supported means 760L. If the degree of rubbing with the edge of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 is large, the coating of the electrical wiring DK2 may be damaged early or the electrical wiring DK2 may be broken early.

  As a countermeasure, it is possible to provide a cylindrical intermediate member (collar) capable of sliding between the cylindrical overhang portion 714 and the electrical wiring DK2, or to wrap a separate covering member around the electrical wiring DK2. The cost of the separate parts will increase, leading to an increase in the cost of the product.

  On the other hand, by making the inner circumferential shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 concave toward the central axis at a plurality of points of the circle, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 that is easily displaced along the edge of the opening 714a can be obtained. Since the restriction can be made at the locations of the protruding pins 715 and the fastening portions 716, the degree of rubbing of the electrical wiring DK2 with the edge of the cylindrical overhang portion 714 can be suppressed to a low level.

  This improvement does not require a separate member, and solves the problem simply by devising the inner peripheral shape of the opening 714a. Therefore, the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 can be improved while suppressing an increase in product cost.

  Although it is possible to limit the free displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 by winding the spiral tube around the electrical wiring DK2, in this case the resistance of the displacement of the second operation unit 700 due to the rigidity of the spiral tube. May increase. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the displacement resistance is reduced by omitting the disposition of the spiral tube, the free displacement of the electric wiring DK2 is restricted by the posture change of the shaft support means 760 described later. There is.

  The left and right end upper stoppers 717 are configured to be able to abut on the lateral side surface of the connection means 770 pivotally supported by the cylindrical overhanging portion 714, and the contact defines the upward displacement end of the connection means 770. Thereby, the displacement angle of the connection means 770 can be limited.

  The left and right end lower stoppers 719 are configured to be able to abut on the rotational direction side surface of the arc-shaped projection 775 of the connection means 770 pivotally supported by the cylindrical overhang portion 714, and the downward movement of the connection means 770 Define the termination. Thereby, the displacement angle of the connection means 770 can be limited.

  As described above, the left and right end upper stoppers 717 and the left and right end lower stoppers 719 are configured to be able to abut on the connecting means 770 in the rotational direction of the connecting means 770, but the front and rear positions contacting with the connecting means 770 are different. . Thereby, it is possible to avoid the accumulation of the load (fatigue) accompanying the contact at the specific position (front and back position) of the connection means 770, and the durability of the connection means 770 can be improved.

  The contact position corresponding to the displacement direction of the connection means 770 can be selected according to the purpose. For example, in the present embodiment, the upward displacement is a displacement of the effect means 780 toward the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15), and the connection means 770 is the back side of the game board 13 at the end position of upward displacement. It is not necessary to finely adjust the end position of displacement since it is difficult to be seen by the player (see FIG. 2). Therefore, it is possible to adopt an option of defining the displacement by contacting with the external portion where the design change is difficult due to the strength and the structural relationship of the connecting means 770.

  In addition, since the gravity is directed in the direction of suppressing the displacement of the coupling means 770 during the upward displacement, the displacement speed of the coupling means 770 is suppressed. Therefore, the option of defining the displacement by contacting the thin portion of the connection means 770 can be adopted.

  On the other hand, the downward displacement is the displacement of the rendering means 780 toward the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15) and the arrangement is determined by the coupling means 770 and the coupling means 770 at the end position of the downward displacement. Since the pivot support means 760L and 760R are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 so that they can be easily seen by the player (see FIG. 16), it is considered that fine adjustment of the displacement end position is required in the design trial stage. Be Therefore, the connection means 770 and the shaft support means 760 L, 760 R at the design trial stage are adopted not in the outer shape but in the case of adopting the option of contacting the arcuate projection 775 for easy design change to define displacement. It is possible to minimize the design change required for the fine adjustment of the displacement end position of.

  That is, the displacement end positions of the connection means 770 and the shaft support means 760L and 760R can be changed by changing the shape and the arrangement of the arc-shaped protrusion 775.

  In addition, at the time of the downward displacement, gravity is directed in the same direction as the displacement of the connection means 770, and there is also a possibility of adopting an effect of displacing the effect means 780 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 at high speed. Since it is high, the downward displacement of the connection means 770 tends to be fast, and the load at the time of contact is considered to be large.

  Therefore, since the connection means 770 may be broken if the thin portion is brought into contact, the arc-shaped projection 775 is formed long to secure a large contact area, and the pressure applied to the connection means 770 is reduced. The durability of the connecting means 770 can be improved by adopting the option of “planning”.

  As described above, also in the present embodiment, the contact positions of the connection means 770 and the left and right end upper stoppers 717 and the left and right end lower stoppers 719 are set according to the purpose. Therefore, when the purpose changes with the arrangement of the second operation unit 700 with respect to the third symbol display device 81 or the direction of the displacement, there are options for the contact position of the connection means 770 and options to be adopted. It is natural that there is a possibility of change.

  The displacement base member 720 has a main plate portion 721 to which the metal slide rail 711 is fastened and fixed on the back side, and a columnar shape protruding from the center in the left-right direction of the main plate portion 721 in a columnar shape. A projecting fastening portion 722 is formed with a female screw capable of screwing a screw member for fixing the end portion of the head, and a long opening 723 bored in the left half of the main body plate portion 721 in a laterally long shape. And a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 724 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a front view from the main body plate portion 721, and from the main body plate portion 721 to the front side at the upper and lower positions outside the lateral direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 724 Upper and lower stoppers 727 protruding to limit the displacement angle of the supported means 760L and 760R, and left and right pair formed in the lower half of the main body plate portion 721 to avoid interference between the electrical wiring DK3 and other components One of Mainly comprising a Wataru avoidance component 728.

  The long opening 723 is an opening through which the connection post 743b and the collar C1 of the transmission means 740 are inserted, and is formed with a width and a length in which the connection post 743b and the collar C1 can be displaced.

  The cylindrical overhanging portion 724, like the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 described above for the fixed base member 701, has an outer peripheral shape that is circular in a front view, so that the axially supported means 760L and 760R can be rotatably supported. An opening 724a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a plurality of positioning pins 725 projecting from the front end to the front side, and a portion where the projecting pins 725 are not provided And a plurality of fastening portions 726 which are internally threaded at the front end.

  The opening 724a is a passage of the electrical wiring DK3. That is, the electrical wiring DK3 is guided in the front-rear direction through the opening 724a. The electrical wiring DK3 is connected to the supported means 760L, 760R and the rendering means fixed to the displacement base member 720, the details of which will be described later.

  The protruding pin 725 and the fastening portion 726 are surfaces forming the shape of the opening 724a, and a circle formed by connecting surfaces on which neither the projecting pin 725 nor the fastening portion 726 is disposed (the circumscribed circle of the opening 724a) It is formed to project toward the center of the That is, the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhang portion 724 is different from the outer peripheral shape (circular shape), and the circular shape is a shape which is recessed toward the central axis at a plurality of places on the circumference.

  Here, for example, when the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 is a perfect circular shape, the durability of the electrical wiring DK3 may be reduced. That is, since the electric wiring DK3 inserted into the opening 724a is connected to the electric decoration substrate 764 of the axially supported means 760L, there is a possibility that it may be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the axially supported means 760L. If the degree of rubbing with the edge of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 is large, the coating of the electrical wiring DK3 may be damaged early or the electrical wiring DK3 may be broken early.

  As a countermeasure, it is possible to provide a cylindrical intermediate member (collar) capable of sliding between the cylindrical overhang portion 724 and the electrical wiring DK3, or to wind a separate covering member around the electrical wiring DK3. The cost of the separate parts will increase, leading to an increase in the cost of the product.

  On the other hand, by making the inner circumferential shape of the cylindrical overhang portion 724 concave toward the central axis at a plurality of points of the circle, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK3 that is easily displaced along the edge of the opening 724a is It can be limited at the location of the protruding pin 725 and the fastening portion 726. That is, since the displacement of the electrical wiring DK3 can be stopped by the protruding pins 725 and the fastening portions 726, and the displacement angle of the electrical wiring DK3 can be restricted to a small degree, the electrical wiring DK3 with respect to the edge of the cylindrical overhang portion 724. The degree of rubbing can be kept small.

  This improvement does not require a separate member, and solves the problem simply by devising the inner peripheral shape of the opening 724a. Therefore, the durability of the electrical wiring DK3 can be improved while suppressing an increase in the product cost.

  The upper and lower stoppers 727 are configured to be able to regulate the displacement of the supported means 760L and 760R, but when the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the end of the upward and downward displacement and stopped, either one of the upper and lower ones Is not necessarily in contact with the supported means 760L, 760R.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the rising end position, the lower stopper and the axially supported means 760L, 760R abut against each other (the axially supported means 760L, 760R The upper stopper is disposed such that a gap is generated between the shaft support means 760L and 760R even when the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the lower end position).

  As a result, when the displacement base member 720 is displaced at high speed toward the lowering end position, the displacement base member 720 reaches the lowering end position even if the shaft supporting means 760L and 760R are interlocked and displaced at high speed. At this time, the supported means 760L, 760R and the upper upper and lower stoppers 727 do not abut each other, and therefore, the upper stoppers are mounted as compared with the case where the gap between the supported means 760L, 760R is not provided. The load applied to the upper and lower stoppers 727 from the bearing means 760L, 760R can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the rotational end of the supported means 760L, 760R is defined by the relationship with the connecting means 770 (see FIG. 54), and the supported means 760L, 760R are arranged at the upper rotation end position. Even in this case, the upper and lower stoppers 727 are formed such that a slight gap is generated between the bearing means 760L and 760R and the upper stopper.

  The upper and lower stoppers 727 are provided in the form of thin plates at the upper and lower sides, corresponding to the respective cylindrical projecting portions 724. As a result, since a slight bending deformation can be generated at the time of contact with the supported means 760L, 760R, it is possible to partially cancel the load applied to the supported means 760L, 760R at the time of contact. Thereby, breakage prevention of the shaft support means 760L, 760R can be achieved.

  In particular, since the load due to the weight of the axially supported means 760L and 760R is easily applied to the lower stopper for a long time, in the configuration in which the bending deformation is allowed as described above, the bending deformation state continues for a long time The shape may be fixed while being bent and deformed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the opposite side of the contact surface of the lower stopper, a projecting portion 727a, which is provided on the front side in a similar manner to the upper and lower stoppers 727, is disposed oppositely with a gap. . The lower stopper and the projecting portion 727a are connected at the upper and lower end portions of the surfaces facing each other, so that the deformation of the lower stopper is configured to be received by the projecting portion 727a.

  Thus, the degree of bending deformation of the upper and lower stoppers 727 can be adjusted. That is, the degree of the bending deformation of the lower stopper can be reduced as compared with the upper stopper because the protruding portion 727a receives the load (the amount of resistance is generated). As a result, even if the load due to the own weight of the supported means 760L and 760R is generated for a long time, the amount of bending deformation of the lower stopper can be suppressed to a small amount, so the shape may be fixed while being bent and deformed. Can be lowered.

  In the above, a simple method of adjusting the amount of bending deformation of the stopper while keeping the resin formability high while making the thickness of the upper and lower stoppers 727 (thickness in the rotational direction of the shaft support means 760L, 760R) equal at the top and bottom. However, the method of adjusting the amount of bending deformation of the stopper is not limited to this, and various methods are exemplified. For example, a flexible (highly deformable) cushion member may be provided, or the stopper may be configured to be displaceably supported by the main body plate portion 721.

  The interference avoidance configuration portion 728 is formed so as to connect the long opening 728a formed in the left and right long shapes in the main body plate portion 721 and the upper and lower edge portions of the left and right center positions of the long opening 728 And a U-shaped overhanging portion 728b in a side view U-shape projecting to the front side. The long opening 728 is an opening through which the electric wiring DK3 passes, and the U-shaped overhanging portion 728b is formed for one purpose of supporting the electric wiring DK3, which will be described in detail later.

  The drive means 730 includes a drive motor 731 capable of rotationally driving in both forward and reverse directions, a support plate 732 to which a motor case of the drive motor 731 is fastened and fixed, and a drive that penetrates the support plate 732 and is inserted to the front side. It mainly includes a motor gear 733 inserted and fixed to the shaft, and a transmission gear 734 meshed with the motor gear 733 and pivotally supported by a columnar fastening portion 705a of the support means 705 of the fixed base member 701.

  The support plate 732 is fastened and fixed from the rear side to the main body plate portion 702 in the assembled state (see FIG. 39), and in this assembled state, the transmission gear 734 is in a position where front view can be made through the toothed opening 705e of the support means 705. A part of the teeth is disposed so as to be able to extend, and the teeth and the end gear 745 mesh with each other, so that the driving force generated by the drive motor 731 can be transmitted to the transmission means 740.

  The transmission means 740 is a ring member 741 externally fitted with a gap in the circular overhanging portion 708 and a front side end face of the circular overhanging portion 708 in a state of being aligned with the projecting pin 709 before being fixed. A rotary arm member 743 disposed between the lid member 742 and the front lid member 742 and the ring member 741 and having a proximal opening 743a pivotally supported by the circular overhanging portion 708, and a length of the rotary arm member 743 The transmission hole 744 drilled in a long shape, the end gear 745 rotatably supported by the annular recessed portion 705b and the columnar fastening portion 705c of the support means 705, and the rotation axis from the eccentric position of the end gear 745 And a detection device of photocoupler type capable of detecting the rotational position of the end gear 745 (that the end gear 745 is in the initial arrangement) and the eccentric column 746 protruding in parallel with and inserted into the transmission hole 744. Mainly it includes a detection sensor 747 which is fixed to the main plate portion 702.

  The ring member 741 is a member for reducing friction, and by sliding between the pivoting arm member 743 and the main body plate portion 702, the increase in frictional resistance is suppressed, and the operation of the pivoting arm member 743 is smooth. I am trying to be

  In addition, since the circular protrusion 708 on which the ring member 741 is supported reduces the friction in the rotational direction of the ring member 741 by the ridges 710, the ring member 741 can be easily slid.

  The proximal end side opening 743a of the pivoting arm member 743 is also rotatably supported by the outside in a range where the ridge 710 of the circular projecting portion 708 is formed similarly to the ring member 741. Not only the reduction of the rotational direction friction of the ring member 741 but also the reduction of the rotational direction friction of the rotating arm member 743 can be achieved.

  The pivoting arm member 743 includes a connecting post 743b projecting in a columnar shape from the rotation tip side to the front side. The connection post 743b is inserted into the long opening 723 of the displacement base member 720, and the driving force is transmitted to the displacement base member 720 through the connection post 743b.

  A collar C1 which is a member for reducing friction and is formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed in the connection post 743b, and a screw with a flange is screwed into an internal thread formed at the tip of the connection post 743b. Thus, the collar C1 prevents the collar C1 from coming off.

  The pivoting arm 743 has a recessed relief portion in the upper side portion of the transmission hole 744 from the back side to the front side (see FIG. 44). The recessed relief portion is a relief shape portion for avoiding interference with the detection sensor 747 when the pivoting arm 743 is disposed at the rising end position (see FIG. 50). Thereby, the outer shape of the pivoting arm 743 is expanded to a position that interferes with the detection sensor 747 in front view while avoiding the restriction of the arrangement of the pivoting arm 743 by the detection sensor 747 (widening of the pivoting arm 743 Form).

  The transmission hole 744 is configured as a long hole along the linear direction in most parts, but includes the curved shape portion 744a capable of guiding the eccentric post 746 at the rotation base end of the rotation arm member 743. . The relationship between the curved portion 744a and the eccentric column 746 and the effect of the curved portion 744a will be described later.

  The end gear 745 is meshed with the transmission gear 734 in the assembled state (see FIG. 39), and rotates in conjunction with the rotational drive of the drive motor 731. That is, the driving force of the driving motor 731 is transmitted in the order of the driving motor 731, the motor gear 733, the transmission gear 734, and the end gear 745 to the rotating arm member 743 and the displacement base member 720 further downstream from the end gear 745. It is transmitted.

  A collar C1 which is a member for reducing friction and is formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed in the eccentric column part 746, and a screw with a flange is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the eccentric column part 746 Thus, the collar C1 prevents the collar C1 from coming off.

  In the detection sensor 747, a detection groove is directed in a direction in which the detection portion 745a extended in a plate shape radially outward from the end gear 745 can be inserted, and the detection portion 745a is disposed in the detection groove The arrangement of the end gear 745 is detected depending on whether or not it is present.

  The biasing means 750 includes a spring cover SC1 formed in a plate shape in a front view L shape, a coil spring SP1 disposed on the back side thereof, and a flanged tubular shape disposed to curve the coil spring SP1. And a member 751.

  The flanged cylindrical member 751 is rotatably supported by the rotary shaft SC1j projecting in a circular shape on the back side of the spring cover SC1 and functions as a fixed pulley, and is along the outer peripheral circular portion The coil spring SP1 is arranged to be curved in an arc shape. As a result, since the coil spring SP1 can be expanded and contracted in a substantially L shape, the adjustment freedom of the elastic force of the coil spring SP1 can be improved in a small range as compared with the case where the coil spring SP1 is expanded and contracted linearly. Can.

  The upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 is supported by the spring support portion 704 of the fixed base member 701, and the lower end portion is supported by a screw member screwed into the protruding fastening portion 722 of the displacement base member 720. . That is, the biasing means 750 is disposed on the front side of the displacement base member 720.

  The supported means 760L and 760R are slightly different in outer appearance shape, but many of them are symmetrical about the function related configuration, so one (the left supported means 760L) is also referred to as the supported means 760 and described in detail. And the detailed description of the other (right side supported means 760R) is omitted.

  In the supported means 760, a thin ring member 761 externally fitted with a gap in the cylindrical projecting portion 724, and a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 726 in a state of being aligned with the projecting pin 725 are inserted. Of the front lid member 762 to be fastened and fixed to the front end face of the cylindrical overhang portion 724 and the front lid member 762 and the thin ring member 761 and the proximal end opening of the circular overhang portion 724 A driven displacement member 763 on which the shaft 763a is pivotally supported, an electric decoration substrate 764 fastened and fixed to the front side of the driven displacement member 763, and a portion for guiding the electric wiring DK2 connected to the electric decoration substrate 764 A guide portion 765 disposed on the rotational tip side of the driven displacement member 763; a columnar fastening portion 766 projecting in a cylindrical shape toward the back side on the rotational tip side; and an internal thread formed on the tip side; Arranged in front of the 764 Re design member constituting the design of the diffusion member and the front view of diffusing light mainly includes a decorative member 768 is stacked.

  The thin plate ring member 761 is a member for reducing friction, and by sliding between the driven displacement member 763 and the main body plate portion 702, the increase in frictional resistance is suppressed, and the operation of the driven displacement member 763 is smooth. I am trying to be

  The front lid member 762 includes a wire passing opening 762 a which is formed in a shape following the inner circumferential shape of the opening 724 a. The electric wiring DK3 passes through the opening 762a in the front-rear direction, is guided to the back side of the main body plate portion 721, is guided to the front side through the long opening 728a, and the details will be described later.

  The electric decoration board 764 is provided with the connector part 764a to which electric wiring DK2 and DK3 are connected at both ends. Here, supply of electricity relating to the electric wirings DK2 and DK3 and the electric decoration substrate 764 will be described. First, the electrical wiring DK2 positionally fixed to the binding band passed through the fixing shape portion 718 is connected to the connector portion 764a disposed at the left end portion of the electric decoration substrate 764 of the axially supported means 760L.

  One end of the electric wiring DK3 is connected to the connector portion 764a disposed at the right end of the left electric decoration board 764, and the other end of the electric wiring DK3 is connected to the connection terminal 784 of the rendering means 780. The electric wiring DK3 is disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction, and the electric wiring DK3 on the right side is connected to the connector portion 764a arranged at the left end of the electric decoration board 764 on the right side and the connection terminal 784 of the rendering means 780 .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 are connected at the end of the shaft support means 760, and the arrangement of the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 in the middle of the shaft support means 760 is omitted. There is. By making the electric decoration substrate 764 disposed in the omitted portion play a role as an electric supply means of the electric wirings DK 2 and DK 3, the electric wirings DK 2 and DK 3 are minimized while the displacement range of the electric wirings DK 2 and DK 3 is minimized. , DK3 can be secured for a long time.

  In addition, by causing the electric decoration substrate 783 of the rendering means 780 to play a role as the electric supply means of the electric wiring DK3, the guiding portion 765 disposed at the left end portion of the supported means 760L on the left side is guided. Electricity can be supplied to the right supported means 760R via the electrical wiring DK2.

  Thus, electricity can be supplied to the supported shaft means 760R without connecting the electrical wiring from the right end to the supported shaft means 760R. It is possible to improve the design freedom of the configuration around the pivot support means 760R.

  For example, when performing the displacement to lower the supported means 760 at high speed, it is necessary to consider not to leave the electric wiring DK2 for the supported means 760L, but for the supported means 760R, Is unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a displacement mode in which only the supported means 760R is lowered at high speed.

  Also, for example, it becomes easy to arrange a member between the right and left end upper stoppers 717 on the right side and the supported means 760R. Thereby, a member can be arranged on the front side of the connecting means 770, and the connecting means 770 can be concealed by the member.

  Guide portion 765 has an opening portion 765a drilled as an opening through which connector portion 764a (see FIG. 46) of electric decoration substrate 764 can be disposed, and a front surface as a path capable of guiding electric wiring DK2 toward the opening portion 765a. And a path portion 765b which is open on the side and formed in a U-shaped cross section.

  In the cylindrical fastening portion 766, a collar C1 which is a member for reducing friction and is formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed, and a screw with a flange is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip end. The collar C1 prevents the collar C1 from being removed.

  The right electric decoration board 764 differs from the electric decoration board 764 (on the left side) in that there is no connection of electrical wiring through the right end, so the connector on the right end of the right electric decoration board 764 is a connector Department is not provided. Further, for the same reason, the guide portion 765 is not provided in the driven displacement member 763 on the right side.

  The connection means 770 is composed of members having substantially the same shape on the left and right, so the configuration of the connection means 770 on the left side will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the connection means 770 on the right side will be omitted. In the connection means 770, a thin ring member 771 externally fitted with a gap in the cylindrical projecting portion 714 and a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 716 in a state of being aligned with the projecting pin 715 are inserted. Thus, the front lid member 772 fastened and fixed to the front end face of the cylindrical overhang portion 714, and the proximal end opening 773a in the circular overhang portion 714 is disposed between the front lid member 772 and the thin ring member 771. The driven displacement member 773 pivotally supported, the long opening 774 drilled in an elongated shape along the radial direction of the driven displacement member 773, and the back surface of the driven displacement member 773 are centered on the center of the opening 773 a An arc-shaped projection 775 projecting in an arc shape is mainly provided.

  The thin plate ring member 771 is a member for reducing friction, and by sliding between the driven displacement member 773 and the raised portion from the main body plate portion 702, the increase in frictional resistance is suppressed. We are trying to make the operation smooth.

  The front lid member 772 is configured as a member having the same shape as the front lid member 762 and includes an opening 772a for wiring through which is formed in a shape following the inner peripheral shape of the opening 714a. The electric wiring DK2 passes through the opening 772a in the front-rear direction, is guided to the guide portion 765, and is connected to the connector portion 764a of the electric decoration substrate 764.

  The long opening 774 receives the cylindrical fastening portion 766 of the driven displacement member 763 from the front side, receives the collar C1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 766 from the back side, and is formed at the tip of the cylindrical fastening portion 766 The flanged screw is screwed into the female screw. In this state, since the collar C1 is prevented from coming off by the flange of the flanged screw, the connection means 770 is supported by the supported means 760 in a non-fallable manner.

  The arc-shaped projection 775 is disposed to be able to abut on the left and right end lower stoppers 719, and this abutment defines the rotational end of the connection means 770, which will be described in detail later.

  The effect means 780 has an effect base member 781 in which a plurality of leg portions 782 protruding toward the rear side are fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 720, and an outer surface of the effect base member 781 is fastened and fixed from the front side. And a lower shielding member 788 which is fastened and fixed to the back side of the lower half of the effect base member 781 and blocks the line of sight from the lower side.

  The effect base member 781 has a plurality of legs disposed toward the back of the main body plate 781a with a gap slightly longer than the horizontal width of the vertically long portion of the spring cover SC1 and the disk-shaped main body plate 781a. An electric decoration board 783 having a portion 782 and an LED (light emitting means) for emitting light to the front side and fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body plate portion 781 and an electric decoration board 783 A plurality of connection terminals 784 configured to be connectable to the wiring DK3 and a plurality of insertion openings 785 bored in the main body plate portion 781a are provided.

  The insertion opening 785 is an assembly opening 785a drilled in a range including the connection terminal 784 in a rear view near the center of the main body plate portion 781a, and a restriction formed by drilling left and right at the radial outer side of the main body plate portion 781a. And an opening 785b. The restriction opening 785 b functions as an opening for restricting the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK 3, the details of which will be described later.

  The decoration member 786 is configured by stacking and arranging a plurality of members. That is, a diffusion member for diffusing light and a design member formed of a light transmitting resin material and constituting a design shape in a front view are stacked and arranged. Thereby, the stage effect of the stage by the light irradiated from the light emission means of the electric decoration board | substrate 783 can be improved.

  The lower side shielding member 788 is a member that blocks the line of sight from the lower side (the line of sight when the player moves the line of sight as looking upward from the third symbol display device 81), and the lower side shielding member 788 The purpose is to prevent the biasing means 750 from being seen from the lower side in the standby state, but the details will be described later.

  50, 51 and 52 are front views of the second operation unit 700. FIG. In FIGS. 50, 51 and 52, the displacement base member 720 of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in time series as being displaced from the rising end position to the falling end position. In FIG. 50, FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the illustration of the electric decoration substrate 764, the decoration member 768 and the rendering means 780 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

  FIG. 50 illustrates the displacement base member 720 disposed at the rising end position, and FIG. 51 illustrates the displacement base member 720 disposed at an intermediate position between the rising end position and the lowering end position. In FIG. 52, the state in which the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the lowering end position is illustrated.

  In FIG. 51, a state in which the lower left and right end stoppers 719 and the arcuate convex portion 775 (see FIG. 46) of the connecting means 770 start to abut is illustrated. That is, among the intermediate positions, the end position of the section in which the posture of the driven displacement member 763 is maintained during the downward displacement of the displacement base member 720 is illustrated, and the displacement base member 720 descends beyond the state shown in FIG. Along with the displacement, the attitude of the driven displacement member 763 changes (see FIG. 52).

  As the end gear 745 rotates until the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the lower end position, the eccentric post 746 enters the curved shape 744 a of the transmission hole 744. The curved shape portion 744a is formed as an opening which curves along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the end gear 745 in the state of FIG. 52, and the curved shape portion 744a is traveled while the eccentric column portion 746 travels. The position of the pivoting arm member 743 is maintained.

  That is, if the curved portion 744a is used as a decelerating section before the end gear 745 stops, the end gear 745 is rotated at high speed to displace the displacement base member 720 up and down at high speed. The displacement base member 720 can be prevented from being displaced during the deceleration of 745. Therefore, after the downward displacement of the displacement base member 720 is performed at high speed, it can be accurately stopped at the lower end position (can be made to stop suddenly).

  In addition, when the end gear 745 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state where the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the lower end position, rotation is performed while the eccentric column 746 advances in the curved shape portion 744a at the start of rotation. The posture of the moving arm member 743 is maintained, and the resistance of the rotating arm member 743 due to its own weight is not loaded. Therefore, the magnitude required as the driving force at the start of driving of the driving motor 731 can be reduced.

  In addition, the curved shape portion 744a is configured to have a length that restricts the eccentric column portion 746 from continuing to rotate clockwise in a front view. That is, of the positions (positions on the circumference centering on the rotation axis of the terminal gear 745) where the eccentric column 746 can be displaced, the eccentric pillar 746 is in a range closer to the rotation axis of the rotating arm member 743. Are disposed with a length that can not include the eccentric column 746 inside.

  Thereby, even if the end gear 745 can not be fully decelerated, even if it is further rotated clockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 52, a lock is applied between the eccentric column 746 and the curved portion 744a, and the rotation arm member It is possible to prevent the 743 from being displaced upward.

  The electric wiring DK2 guided to the front side through the upper left corner of the opening 772a of the front lid member 772 disposed on the front side of the opening 714a on the left side The fixing member is fixed by the fixing member, and extends from the fixing shape portion 718 to the guiding portion 765 with a margin length, and is fixed to the guiding portion 765 by a fixing member such as a binding band.

  The electrical wiring DK2 is guided in the direction toward the opening 765a through the inside of the path portion 765b, but the guide straight line D1 which is a straight line coinciding with this direction is the rotational radial direction of the axis of rotation of the supported means 760 Match (through the axis of rotation). That is, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK2 is guided to the supported shaft means 760 from the rotational radial direction of the supported shaft means 760.

  Thus, the load (load in the tension direction or load in the compression direction) applied to the electrical wiring DK2 along with the rotational displacement of the supported means 760 is equally generated regardless of the rotational direction of the supported means 760. be able to. That is, since the load given to the electrical wiring DK2 can be made uniform with the rotational displacement of the supported means 760, the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 can be improved.

  In the vertical movement in FIGS. 50 to 51, the end (hereinafter also referred to as the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2) of the electrical wiring DK2 connected to the axially supported means 760 is displaced in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the vertical movement in FIG. 51 to FIG. 52, the connection end of the electrical wiring DK1 is displaced in the direction including the left-right direction component as the supported means 760 changes in posture. The displacement of the connection end of the electrical wiring DK1 will be described.

  In the vertical movement in FIGS. 51 to 52, the displacement base member 720 is lowered by the first distance L1, while the movement distance of the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 is shortened to the second distance L2 (L1> L2 ). That is, since the load that can be applied to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the electrical wiring DK2, disconnection of the electrical wiring DK2 can be easily avoided.

  Furthermore, by shortening the displacement amount of the electrical wiring DK2, the moving range of the electrical wiring DK2 can be easily kept within the range hidden by the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the gaming board 13, and the electrical wiring DK2 is Since it can be made difficult for the user to visually recognize, the electric wiring DK2 can be easily arranged close to the front side.

  Further, the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 is raised and displaced while the displacement base member 720 is lowered and displaced. As a result, when stopping the displacement base member 720 that has been down-displaced, it is possible to previously give the electric wiring DK2 an upward load against the downward load generated due to inertia to the electric wiring DK2. Therefore, the load that can be applied to the electrical wiring DK2 can be offset, and the fatigue that is applied to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced.

  The state in which the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the lowering end position is a state in which the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 is most separated from the fixing forming portion 718, and a large tensile load is easily generated in the electrical wiring DK2. In this case, the guide straight line D1 coinciding with the direction in which the electrical wiring DK2 is guided by the shaft support means 760 approaches the fixing forming portion 718.

  Thus, in a state where the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 is most separated from the fixing formation portion 718, the electrical wiring DK2 can be arranged in a state of extending straight from the fixing formation portion 718 to the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the generation of a load in the pulling direction on the electrical wiring DK2.

  Thus, although the rotational displacement of the supported means 760 suitably acts on the displacement of the electrical wiring DK2, if it is caused to rotationally displace the supported means 760 only for the displacement of the electrical wiring DK2, Only the left support means 760L may be rotationally displaced, and the right support means 760R may be fixed to the displacement base member 720. In this case, the second operation unit 700 can configure left-right asymmetrical operation effects.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by causing the displacement of the supported means 760 in left-right symmetry, the vertical movement of the second operation unit 700 can be generated with good balance between the left and the right. Wobble of the member 720 can be suppressed. Furthermore, by causing the displacement of the supported means 760 to be symmetrical in the left-right direction, the balance as the operation effect can be improved.

  The driven displacement member 763 of the supported means 760 has a wire fixing portion 763 b formed on the side close to the front lid member 762 so as to be able to insert a fixing member such as a binding band in order to fix the electric wiring DK3.

  The connector arranged on the opposite side of the front lid member 762 with respect to the portion fixed by the wiring fixing portion 763b of the electric wiring DK3 is connected to the connector portion 764a (see FIG. 46) of the electric decoration substrate 764.

  An effect different from the effect described above as the effect of the curved shape portion 744a will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 53, the manner in which the pivoting arm member 743 reciprocates around the lowering end position of the displacement base member 720 is illustrated in time series.

  53 (a), 53 (b) and 53 (c) are front views of the pivoting arm member 743 and the end gear 745. FIG. In FIG. 53 (a), the eccentric column 746 enters the curved portion 744a, and the pivoting arm 743 is at a position where the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the lower end position (hereinafter referred to as pivoting arm 743). 53 (b), the end gear 745 rotates counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 53 (a), and the turning arm member 743 is positioned halfway (see FIG. 53 (b)). 51 (c), the pivoting arm member 743 is downwardly displaced by the weight of the displacement base member 720, and the pivoting arm member 743 disposed at the descending end position is illustrated in FIG. Be done.

  53 (a) to 53 (c) are controlled so as to release the driving force after the driving force of the drive motor 731 is generated in one direction, for example. It can happen if.

  That is, the drive motor 731 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 53 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), and when the state shown in FIG. 53 (b) is reached, the driving force is released. As a result, when the pivoting arm member 743 is lowered to the lowering end position, the state shown in FIG. 53 (c) is reached.

  In the state shown in FIG. 53 (c), not the driving force of the drive motor 731 but the end gear 745 as a result of being driven by the downward movement of the rotating arm member 743 due to its own weight is illustrated. 746 does not enter curved shape 744a.

  Therefore, since the above-mentioned eccentric column part 746 does not produce the function of spring back prevention which arises by entering into curve shape part 744a, after becoming in the state shown in Drawing 53 (c), rotation arm member 743 carries out spring return displacement ( Bouncing displacement) can be configured.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the pivoting arm member 743 is disposed at the lowering end position by the driving force of the drive motor 731 and when the pivoting arm member 743 is disposed at the lowering end position by its own weight, the springback displacement thereof. Since the ease of (bound displacement) can be changed, the operation of the pivoting arm member 743 can be provided with unexpectedness.

  Here, the displacement under the own weight and the operating speed tend to be nonuniform as compared with a controllable mode such as the operation with the drive motor 731. Also, variations are likely to occur due to indeterminate circumstances such as the sliding resistance and the installation angle of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). For example, in some cases, the pivoting arm member 743 may be downwardly displaced at a high speed due to the weight of the displacement base member 720 or the like, or in some cases, it may be downwardly displaced slightly slowly.

  When the downward displacement of the pivoting arm member 743 occurs at high speed, the eccentric pillar portion 746 is also displaced vigorously, so the eccentric pillar portion 746 is in the transmission hole 744 when the pivoting arm member 743 is disposed at the lowering end position. If the transmission hole 744 exerts a large load on the eccentric post 746, the eccentric post 746 may break prematurely.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pivoting arm member 743 is disposed at the lower end position, the eccentric post 746 stays in the curved shape 744a, and the inner surface of the longitudinal end of the transmission hole 744 As a result, the durability of the eccentric column 746 can be improved.

  Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect of repeatedly producing the change along the time series shown in FIG. 53A to FIG. 53C while minimizing the load on the eccentric column 746. In order to repeatedly cause the changes along the time series shown in FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c), the drive mode for changing from the state of FIG. 53 (a) to the state of FIG. 53 (b) is intermittent. You just have to As a result, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the axially supported means 760 (see FIG. 38) repeats the up and down reciprocating displacement in small increments.

  FIG. 54 is a front view of the second operation unit 700. FIG. In FIG. 54, the displacement base member 720 is illustrated in the lowered end position. In FIG. 54, the electric decoration substrate 764, the decoration member 768, and the effect means 780 are omitted to facilitate understanding.

  FIG. 54 illustrates a state in which the axially supported means 760 is displaced upward as compared with the state illustrated in FIG. That is, as compared with the inclination angle of the supported means 760 with respect to the horizontal line in the state shown in FIG. 52, the inclination angle of the supported means 760 with respect to the horizontal line is larger in the state shown in FIG.

  The state as shown in FIG. 54 occurs, for example, when the displacement base member 720 is sharply lowered and disposed at the falling end position. In this case, the displacement base 720 is maintained at the lower end position due to the effect of the above-described bounce prevention (bounce prevention), while inertia acts to continue the displacement while changing the inclination angle to the supported means 760. , Only the supported means 760 will be displaced.

  Here, while the acceleration due to inertia acting on the supported means 760 is smaller than the acceleration due to its own weight, only the supported means 760 is not displaced, and the displacement base member 720 is maintained at the falling end position. Similarly, the pivot means 760 is maintained in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  That is, depending on the magnitude of the descent speed of the displacement base member 720, if the arrangement of the pivoting support means 760 is maintained after the displacement base member 720 reaches the descent end position (descent speed low), It is possible to configure the case where the supported means 760 is displaced due to inertia after reaching the lowering end position (the lowering speed is high). Thereby, the rendering effect can be improved.

  Also in the change from the state shown in FIG. 52 to the state shown in FIG. 54, the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced upward, which is the fixing shape portion 718 side, so the electrical wiring DK2 is excessively pulled. Can be avoided.

  Here, when the displacement base member 720 is displaced downward at a high speed, the inertia of the electrical wiring DK2 becomes larger and the possibility of the electrical wiring DK2 projecting downward increases, but the displacement base member 720 descends at a low speed. Since the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 is further displaced upward as compared to the case of displacement, when stopping the displacement base member 720 which has been displaced downward, the electrical wiring DK2 is opposed to the downward load caused by inertia due to inertia. The upward load given to the wiring DK2 can be increased.

  Therefore, even if the load due to inertia that can be applied to the electrical wiring DK2 is large, it can be sufficiently offset by the upward load given to the electrical wiring DK2 in advance, thereby reducing the fatigue applied to the electrical wiring DK2. be able to.

  The feature of displacing the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 upward due to the displacement of the shaft support means 760 effectively functions in the case where the electrical wiring DK2 needs slack, so as in the present embodiment, This is particularly useful when there are a plurality of variations in displacement of the pivot means 760.

  That is, in the case where there are a plurality of variations of displacement of the supported means 760, in order to suppress the tensile load generated on the electrical wiring DK2 with the entire arrangement of the supported means 760, the supported means that minimizes the slack of the electrical wiring DK2. As compared with the arrangement of 760 (see FIG. 54), the slack of the electrical wiring DK2 becomes larger in the arrangement of the other supported means 760 (see FIGS. 51 and 52).

  Therefore, without the countermeasure, in the arrangement where the slack of the electric wiring DK2 becomes large, the electric wiring DK2 is easily displaced excessively by the inertia force, the possibility of being visually recognized by the player becomes high, and there is a possibility that the effect may be produced. .

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration of displacing the axially supported means 760 so as to generate a load in a direction that cancels out the load on the inertia that can be applied to the electrical wiring DK2, Even if control is performed to stop the supported means 760 in an arrangement where the slack increases, it is easy to suppress excessive displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 due to inertia force, so the electrical wiring DK2 can be viewed by the player You can reduce the sex.

  In the present embodiment, the limit position of the positional deviation of the supported means 760 due to inertia is defined by the relationship with the connecting means 770. That is, as shown in FIG. 54, the rotational upper end position of the pivotal support means 760 is set as the position where the cylindrical fastening portion 766 is disposed at the end of the long opening 774 of the connection means 770. That is, the supported means 760 is configured to be rotationally displaceable between the inclination angle shown in FIG. 52 and the inclination angle shown in FIG.

  In other words, the connection means 770 prevents the displacement of the axially supported means 760 due to inertia from occurring excessively, thereby maintaining a low load for giving the operating range of the axially supported means 760 to the electrical wiring DK2. It can be limited to a range.

  Thus, in addition to the function of providing a time difference between the displacement period of the displacement base member 720 and the rotational displacement period of the shaft support 760, the connection device 770 is a load that applies the displacement of the shaft support 760 to the electrical wiring DK2. Is limited to the range where it is kept low. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 can be improved by the member that can execute the operation effect with a time difference.

  In this embodiment, a displacement mode (see FIG. 52) in which the displacement base member 720 is displaced to the lower end position by the driving force of the drive motor 731 and a displacement mode in which the displacement base member 720 is displaced to the lower end position by its own weight (FIG. 53) And the second operation unit 700 can be operated.

  In addition, as a displacement mode of the pivotal support means 760 after the displacement base member 720 reaches the lowering end position, a displacement mode in which the displacement base member 720 is maintained at the posture when reaching the lowering end position, and displacement The second operation unit 700 can be operated in a displacement mode in which displacement continues by inertia even after the base member 720 reaches the lowered end position.

  Among control methods for intentionally selecting and generating these displacement modes, the other methods of adjusting the speed of the downward displacement will be described.

  The displacement base member 720 is configured to be displaceable between the rising end position and the falling end position, and by adjusting the length of time from the arrival of the falling end position to the start of the rising displacement, The displacement mode of the bearing means 760 can be adjusted.

  For example, when the time from when the displacement base member 720 reaches the lowering end position to when starting the upward displacement is short, a load in the rotational direction that pushes back the axially supported means 760 is generated, and the inertial force of the axially supported means 760 Is offset. Therefore, the displacing base member 720 is raised and displaced without causing the pivotally supporting means 760 to be rotationally displaced (not to be in the posture shown in FIG. 54).

  On the other hand, for example, when the time from when the displacement base member 720 reaches the lowering end position to when starting the upward displacement is long, the axially supported means 760 is rotationally displaced by inertia force (the attitude shown in FIG. If there is no load in the rotational direction that pushes back the pivot means 760 until it comes to a point, the pivot means 760 is excessively rotationally displaced by inertia force and returned to the rotation lower end position by gravity before being displaced. The base member 720 is displaced upward.

  As described above, by adjusting the length of time from the arrival of the displacement base member 720 to the downward end position and the start of the upward displacement, the displacement mode of the axially supported means 760 can be adjusted.

  55 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 taken along line LV-LV in FIG. In FIG. 55, the electric decoration substrate 764, the decoration member 768 and the rendering means 780 which are not shown in FIG. 50 are shown without being omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 55, since the electric wiring DK3 is a pair of electric wirings arranged substantially symmetrically, the details of the electric wiring DK3 will be described as the arrangement of the electric wiring DK3 on the left side. I omit explanation.

  The electric wiring DK3 is disposed to be inserted from the back side to a plurality of locations of the displacement base member 720, and one end is connected to the connector portion 764a from the back side through the opening 724a, and the other end is It is connected to the connection terminal 784 from the rear side through the long opening 728a. The openings 724a and the long openings 728a are formed at positions shielded by the rendering means 780 in a front view in the assembled state, so that it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK3 from being viewed by the player in front view (See Figure 16). Hereinafter, the connector 764a side will be described as the upstream side of the electrical wiring DK3 and the connection terminal 784 side as the downstream side of the electrical wiring DK3.

  The arrangement of the electrical wiring DK3 is fixed at the downstream side. In other words, only the upstream side of the opening 724a needs to be displaced in the electric wiring DK3 under the influence of the operation of the other configuration. That is, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK3 occurs under the influence of the displacement of the connector portion 764a due to the rotational displacement of the supported means 760.

  Here, since the electrical wiring DK3 is supported by the opening 724a as the rotation shaft of the supported shaft means 760, a load in the pulling direction is generated in the electrical wiring DK3 with the rotation of the supported shaft means 760. It can be made easy to avoid.

  Furthermore, since the electrical wiring DK3 is disposed at the corner (recessed portion) of the opening 762a of the front lid member 762 disposed on the front side of the opening 724a, the opening is greater than when it is disposed in the circular opening. The arrangement within 762a is limited. Thus, the extent to which the electrical wiring DK3 rubs against the edge of the opening 762a can be reduced, so that the durability of the electrical wiring DK3 can be improved.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK3 is made as compared to the case where the electrical wiring DK3 is disposed without passing through the back side of the displacement base member 720 and connected to the connector portion 764a and the connection terminal 784. Can be limited, and generation of tensile load can be avoided in the range, so that the durability of the electrical wiring DK3 can be improved.

  Further, when the electric wiring DK3 is disposed without passing through the rear surface side of the displacement base member 720 and connected to the connector portion 764a and the connection terminal 784, the electric wiring DK3 is guided from the connector portion 764a to the front side. In order to avoid interference with the supported means 760, the electrical wiring DK3 needs to be fixed at a plurality of places.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK3 is guided to the end back side. That is, since the electric wiring DK3 is guided in the direction away from the shaft support means 760, the possibility of interference between the shaft support means 760 and the electric wiring DK3 can be reduced. Therefore, since the number of separate fixing means such as the binding band can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the number of operation steps and the material cost.

  The arrangement of the electrical wiring DK3 on the downstream side will be described. The electric wiring DK3 is connected to the connection terminal 784 through the long opening 728a, through the outside of the U-shaped extension 728b (opposite the spring cover SC1), through the restriction opening 785b of the rendering means 780 .

  By arranging in this manner, interference between the electrical wiring DK3 and the spring cover SC1 can be avoided. That is, as shown in FIG. 55, the electric wiring DK3 is restricted from being displaced close to the spring cover SC1 by the U-shaped extension 728b or the main body plate 781a (see FIG. 48). Even if the electric wiring DK3 is not fixed by the fixing member, the interference between the electric wiring DK3 and the spring cover SC1 can be avoided.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 taken along line LVI-LVI of FIG. 50, FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 taken along line LVII-LVII of FIG. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 taken along line LVIII-LVIII in FIG. 52.

  That is, FIG. 56 illustrates the displacement base member 720 disposed at the rising end position, FIG. 57 illustrates the displacement base member 720 disposed at an intermediate position, and FIG. 58 illustrates the displacement base member. A state where 720 is disposed at the lower end position is illustrated. 56 to 58, the decorative member 768 and the rendering means 780 which are not shown in FIGS. 50, 51 and 52 are shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the coil spring SP1 changes its direction in such a manner as to be wound around the flanged cylindrical member 751, extends downward so as to pass through the front side of the left and right center of the displacement base member 720, and has its tip end It is fixed to the projecting fastening portion 722 of the displacement base member 720.

  A spring cover SC1 is disposed on the front side of the coil spring SP1, and a line of sight from the lateral direction side of the spring cover SC1 is a side wall SC1a protruding from the lateral direction edge of the spring cover SC1 to the back side. It is shielded by Therefore, the coil cover SP1 can hide the coil spring SP1.

  Since the coil spring SP1 is a member that applies a biasing force to the displacement base member 720, it preferably extends from the moving direction (vertical direction) of the displacement base member 720 and is connected to the center (right and left center) of the displacement base member 720.

  On the other hand, when arranging a member for guiding the movement direction of the displacement base member 720 (for example, the metal slide rail 711 in the present embodiment), the same arrangement is preferable, but in order to avoid interference The measures were taken such as displacing from the center or displacing both from the center by the same degree.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the spring cover SC1 is configured to be enterable between the displacement base member 720 and the rendering means 780, and the coil cover SP1 is concealed by the spring cover SC1. Since the coil spring SP1 can be disposed between the displacement base member 720 and the rendering means 780 while avoiding the situation seen by the player, the coil slide SP1 can be disposed by disposing the metal slide rail 711 on the back side of the displacement base 720. Interference with can be easily avoided.

  As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the metal slide rails 711 can be improved, so that both the coil spring SP1 and the metal slide rails 711 can be coupled to the left and right center positions of the displacement base member 720.

  The spring cover SC1 is disposed within the minimum necessary range. For example, as shown in FIG. 58, the protruding fastening portion 722 as the connection end of the coil spring SP1 is displaceable beyond the range in which the spring cover SC1 is formed.

  That is, as in the case of covering the entire arrangement range of the coil spring SP1, it is not a design concept to avoid the exposure of the coil spring SP1 with only the spring cover SC1, but the spring cover to a range where the exposure can be avoided by other members. It is a design concept that SC1 is not formed.

  According to this embodiment, even in the range where the spring cover SC1 is omitted, the rendering means 780 is disposed on the front side so as to partially overlap the spring cover SC1 in a front view. Thus, the exposure of the coil spring SP1 can be prevented.

  By designing in this manner, the vertical length of the spring cover SC1 can be shortened, and the material cost can be reduced. In addition, as described later, the lower end portion of the spring cover SC1 and the lower shielding member 788 of the effect means 780 overlap in the moving direction of the effect means 780, whereby the displaceable range of the effect means 780 by the spring cover SC1 Even if there is a possibility of being limited, the degree of limitation can be lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the rising end position, the player often looks mainly at the second operation unit 700 from the front side in a direction of looking up. As described above, the spring cover SC1 is designed to be able to prevent the coil spring SP1 from being exposed in a front view. On the other hand, in order to widen the arrangement range of the coil spring SP1, the shielding function of the spring cover SC1 can be seen from the direction of looking up, as can be seen from the absence of the side wall SC1a at the lower end of the spring cover SC1. Is not enough.

  In addition, since the state shown in FIG. 56 is the standby state of the second operation unit 700 and there is a possibility of being maintained for the longest time, the coil spring SP1 is visually recognized by the player in the state shown in FIG. It is important to configure it not to In addition, if the degree of shielding of the line of sight is low, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) may be reflected by the area around the coil spring SP1 so that the player may be seen and the rendering effect may be reduced. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower shielding member 788 of the rendering means 780 is disposed over the left and right wide ranges below the spring cover SC1 and the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 48). Can be improved.

  In addition, since the lower shielding member 788 is disposed to a position close to the front end of the displacement base member 720, the coil spring SP1 and the spring cover SC1 can be used as the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to avoid reflection.

  The spring cover SC1 is not limited to the member to which the state is fixed. For example, a part of the spring cover SC1 may be fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 720, and may be configured so as to be capable of expansion and contraction as the displacement base member 720 is displaced. As an implementation method, an example in which the spring cover SC1 is formed of a flexible material that expands and contracts, or an example in which a bellows shape is formed by a cloth or the like is exemplified.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the spring cover SC1 is configured as a fixed plate member, the displacement base member 720 can be prevented from being subjected to displacement resistance from the spring cover SC1. Thereby, the driving force required for the displacement of the displacement base member 720 can be reduced.

  The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative portion arranged on the inner side (lower side) of the boundary wall 86b is fixed to the center frame 86 has been described, but the center frame 2086 of the second embodiment corresponds to the decorative portion. The decorative member 2086f is configured to be displaceable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  59 (a) and 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 2013 according to the second embodiment on the line X-X in FIG. FIG. 59 (a) shows the state where the excitation of the solenoid 2086d is released, and FIG. 59 (b) shows the state where the solenoid 2086d is excited.

  In addition, unlike the glass unit 16 (refer FIG. 1) of 1st Embodiment, the glass unit 2016 in this embodiment is projected and formed in the front side at least on the front side of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. As shown in FIG.

  That is, the glass unit 2016 is a front frame so as to cover the rear side glass unit 2016a and the window portion 14c which are disposed to face the base plate 60 at least on the front side of the game area so as to constitute the front side wall surface of the ball channel. And a front glass unit 2016 b fixed obliquely to the front side 14.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), in addition to the configuration of the center frame 86 described above in the first embodiment, the center frame 2086 includes a solenoid 2086d disposed below the boundary wall 86b, A displacement portion 2086e fixed to the displacement end of the plunger of the solenoid 2086d and having an L-shaped opening and a decorative shape disposed on the inner side (lower side) of the boundary wall 86b and decorated A member 2086f (corresponding to a decorative portion), and a connecting portion 2086g projecting from the end of the decorative member 2086f in a cylindrical shape parallel to the rotation axis and inserted into the opening of the displacement portion 2086e to be coupled to the displacement portion 2086e Mainly to

  The solenoid 2086d is disposed in a posture in which the plunger moves up and down, and when energized, the solenoid becomes an excited state and the plunger projects upward, and when the energization is finished, the excited state is released and the plunger has a return spring attached. Return to the bottom side with power.

  The displacement portion 2086e has a long hole 2086e1 formed of a long long hole in the front and back direction and an auxiliary hole 2086e2 extending upward from the front end of the long hole 2086e1 as an L-shaped opening. Equipped with The thickness of the long hole 2086e1 and the auxiliary hole 2086e2 is configured to be slightly longer than the diameter of the connecting portion 2086g. Thus, the connecting portion 2086g can be configured to move the L-shaped opening.

  The auxiliary hole 2086 e 2 is configured such that the connecting portion 2086 g is disposed in the non-excitation state of the solenoid 2086 d. As a result, the load applied to the displacement portion 2086e through the coupling portion 2086g with the displacement of the decoration member 2086f can be directed in a direction different from the up-down direction in which the plunger of the solenoid 2086d can displace. Wobble can be suppressed.

  The decorative member 2086f is rotatably supported by the left and right axes at the inner position (lower position) of the center frame 2086, and rotates at an angle exceeding 90 degrees when the solenoid 2086d is in an excited state (see FIG. 59 (b)). Thus, the width of the blind spot of the line of sight YE3 can be changed by displacing the decorative member 2086 f.

  That is, in the state before energizing the solenoid 2086 d (see FIG. 59A), not only the boundary wall 86 b but also the decorative member 2086 f intersects the line of sight YE 3. The rear side of the wall 86b (corresponding to the shielded area SE1) was difficult to see, and the blind spot was wide.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 2086b is energized and excited (see FIG. 59 (b)), the decorative member 2086f is disposed outward of the line of sight YE3, so visibility with the line of sight YE3 is enhanced, and the boundary wall 86b It is possible to visually recognize a part of the shielded area SE1 over.

  That is, when only the boundary wall 86b as the light transmitting thin plate crosses the line of sight YE3, the visibility does not deteriorate so that the rear side of the boundary wall 86b in the line of sight YE3 can not be seen as a blind spot, The shielded area SE1 can be visually recognized well.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by driving the solenoid 2086 b, it is possible to change the range of the blind spot through the boundary wall 86 b and the decorative portion. Therefore, for example, in the case where the game area is configured such that the profit obtained by the player may change due to the change in the visibility of the ball rolling on the upper part of the boundary wall 86b, at an appropriate timing. By controlling the solenoid 2086b to drive, the comfort of the game can be improved.

  That is, it is required to move the position of the head to the vicinity of the boundary wall 86b in order to see the ball rolling on the upper part of the boundary wall 86b closely (it is required to move to the vicinity of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1)) Compared to when forced to play the game, the embodiment of the present invention, in which the shielded area SE1 can be visually recognized with the usual arrangement of eyes, can improve the gaming comfort. .

  The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. In the first embodiment, the gap is provided to avoid contact between the spring cover SC1 and the displacement base member 720. However, in the second operation unit 3700 of the third embodiment, the spring cover SC3 is a displacement base. It abuts against the member 3720 and functions as a member for guiding the displacement base member 3720. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  60 (a) and 61 are front views of the second operation unit 3700 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is a front perspective view of the small diameter collar C3. In FIG. 60A and FIG. 61, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the electric decoration substrate 764, the decoration member 768 and the rendering means 780 is omitted.

  60A shows a state in which displacement base member 3720 is disposed at the assembly preparation position located below spring cover SC3. In FIG. 61, a state in which displacement base member 3720 is disposed at the lowering end position. Is illustrated.

  In FIG. 60 (a), the displacement base member 3720 is disposed below the lower end position. That is, in the present embodiment, one feature is that the displacement base member 3720 is assembled by disposing the displacement base member 3720 below the lowering end position and then raising the displacement base member 3720 to the lowering end position. This will be described below.

  First, the difference between the pivoting arm member 3743 of the transmission means 3740 and the pivoting arm member 743 in the first embodiment will be described. The pivoting arm member 3743 omits the formation of the connecting post 743b (see FIG. 43), and a through hole slightly larger than the female screw of the connecting post 743b is drilled at the corresponding position. A similar small diameter collar C3 is provided (see FIG. 61).

  The small diameter is achieved by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the through hole of the small diameter collar C3 into the female screw formed at the tip of the pivoting arm member 3743 (the root position of the connecting column 743b before omission). The collar C3 is supported by the pivoting arm member 3743.

  With this configuration, the long opening 723 of the displacement base member 3720 and the rotation arm member 3743 are not connected before the small diameter collar C3 is assembled to the rotation arm member 3743. Therefore, the displacement base member 3720 is lowered. It can be arranged in the assembly preparation position which is a position below the end position.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 61, the displacement base member 3720 is assembled in a state where the assembly of the shaft support means 760 to the displacement base member 3720 and the assembly of the connection means 770 to the shaft support means 760 and the fixed base member 701 are completed. Can be placed in the assembly preparation position. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the assembly order can be improved.

  By arranging the displacement base member 3720 in the assembly preparation position and then raising it to the lowering end position, the configuration of the upper end portion of the displacement base member 3720 and the spring cover SC3 can be engaged. As described in the first embodiment, the displacement base member 3720 is fixed by fastening and fixing the fastening screw, which is inserted through the small diameter collar C3, to the rotating arm member 3743 in a state where the collar C3 is inserted into the long opening 723. It is possible to restrict displacement below the lowering end position.

  That is, the displacement base member 3720 can be disposed in the assembly preparation position only in a state before assembly, and can be prevented from being disposed in the assembly preparation position after the assembly is completed. As a result, the possibility that the configuration of the upper end portion of the displacement base member 3720 and the engagement with the spring cover SC3 are unintentionally released can be reduced.

  The spring cover SC3 is formed of a light-impermeable resin material or metal material, and is recessed parallel to the left and right ends of the upper and lower long parts SC3a disposed on the front side of the displacement base member 3720 in the vertical direction. A pair of guide recessed portions SC3b and left and right extending portions SC3c extending from the upper end of the upper and lower long portions SC3a to the left and right sides are mainly provided.

  The guide recess SC3b functions as a portion that receives the roller member 3729 of the displacement base member 3720 and guides the vertical displacement of the displacement base member 3720.

  The displacement base member 3720 is provided with a pair of roller members 3729 which are rotatably supported at the left-right symmetric position of the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 721 and configured in a roller-like annular shape. The roller member 3729 is arranged to be engageable with the guide recess SC3b when the displacement base member 3720 is displaced from the assembly preparation position (see FIG. 60A) to the lower end position (see FIG. 61). .

  As a result, with the vertical displacement of the displacement base member 3720, the roller member 3729 abuts against the guide recess SC3b and rolls, thereby causing the movement resistance (friction (friction) between the spring cover SC3 and the displacement base member 3720 to Resistance) can be reduced.

  When the displacement base member 3720 is disposed at the rising end position (the position and orientation at which the displacement base member 720 is disposed in FIG. 50) in an appropriate attitude, the left and right extending portion SC3c contacts the upper end portion of the roller member 3729. It is arranged to be connectable.

  Thus, the left and right extension portion SC3c can function as a portion that corrects the posture of the displacement base member 3720. That is, although displacement of the displacement base member 3720 is suppressed by the engagement of the roller member 3729 and the guide recessed portion SC3b and the metal slide rail 711 (see FIG. 56), deterioration of the roller member 3729 and the metal slide rail 711 Also, due to other reasons, there is a possibility that the posture of the displacement base member 3720 may change in a manner in which it is inclined to the left and right in front view.

  If the vertical movement of the displacement base member 3720 is repeated while changing the posture, the roller member 3729 and the metal slide rail 711 are subjected to an extra load and the deterioration is more likely to progress, so the original posture can be returned. Is preferred.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the displacement base member 3720 is disposed at the rising end position in an appropriate posture, the upper end portion of the roller member 3729 is configured to be able to abut on the left and right extending portion SC3c When the base member 3720 is inclined in the left and right direction, a large load (downward load) applied from the left and right extending portion SC3c to the high-side roller member 3729 can be secured.

  Therefore, the change in posture of the displacement base member 3720 can be returned to the appropriate posture side by the load in the push-down direction generated from the left and right extension parts SC3c. That is, since it is possible to return the posture of the displacement base member 3720 every time the displacement base member 3720 is arranged at the rising end position, it is possible to avoid repeating the vertical displacement while the posture of the displacement base member 3720 is changed. It can be made easy.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, since it is not necessary to arrange the electric wires DK2 and DK3 before the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recess SC3b, the assembling operation can be easily performed.

  The operation of arranging and connecting the electric wirings DK2, DK3 after the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recess SC3b can be easily performed using the configuration described in the first embodiment.

  Incidentally, due to the configuration, it is difficult to assemble the supported means 760 after the pivoting arm member 743 is connected to the displacement base member 3720 (the fastening screw is difficult to fasten), so the state shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 Thus, the supported means 760 is considered to be in an assembled state. That is, the electric decoration board 764 and the decoration member 768 which are not shown in figure are also united, and it is made into the state which electric wiring DK2 and DK3 have projected from the right-and-left end.

  On the other hand, since the small diameter collar C3 is later assembled into the elongated opening 723 of the displacement base member 3720, the assembling of the rendering means 780 into the displacement base member 3720 engages the roller member 3729 with the guide recess SC3b. Will be done later.

  At the descending end position of the displacement base member 3720 shown in FIG. 61, the portions through which the electric wires DK2 and DK3 are inserted (the long opening 728a of the interference avoiding component 728, the opening 762a of the front lid member 762 and the opening 772a of the front lid member 772 It is easy to insert the electric wires DK2 and DK3 into these parts, since they are visible without being hidden.

  For example, with regard to the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK2, after the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recessed portion SC3b, the roller member 3729 is fixed to the fixing shape portion 718 and assembled so as to wrap around the opening 772a. good.

  Also, for example, with regard to the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK3, the displacement end of the electrical wiring DK3 is brought out in advance from the opening 762a to the connection terminal 784 of the rendering means 780 in advance. It may be fastened and fixed to the member 3720.

  As another method of arranging the electrical wiring DK3, the connection end of the electrical wiring DK3 is taken out in advance from the opening 762a and the rendering means 780 is fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 3720 in advance. The connection end of the electrical wiring DK3 may be connected to the connection terminal 784 using a jig (not shown) of According to the present embodiment, a gap for passing the spring cover SC3 is formed between the rendering means 780 and the displacement base member 3720. Therefore, the connection end of the electrical wiring DK3 is connected to the connection terminal using the gap. It can be easily guided to 784.

  Further, at the lowering end position of the displacement base member 3720 shown in FIG. 61, since the displacement base member 3720 and the fixed base member 701 do not overlap in a front view, after the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recess SC3b The displacement base member 3720 of the effect means 780 can be assembled.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. In the first embodiment, the case where the adjustment member 165 as a member that does not affect the shape of the flow-down path FL1 is disposed in the recessed portion 161e of the right rendering unit 160 has been described, but the right rendering unit 4160 of the fourth embodiment In this case, the member disposed in the recess 161e affects the shape of the flow path of the ball. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rendering unit 4160 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rendering unit 4160. The right rendering unit 4160 is a unit including the variable winning device 65, and is fitted to the small window portion 60b of the base plate 60 from the front side. The ball entering the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2) of the variable winning device 65 flows down a flowing path formed on the back side of the right rendering unit 4160, and is guided to a ball discharging path (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right rendering unit 4160 is connected to the base member 161, the first flow path member 162, and the downstream side of the first flow path member 163, and the front side of the flow-down path of the sphere is A second flow path forming means 4163 is provided, and a switching device 4164 is fastened and fixed on the back side of the second flow path forming means 4163 to switch the flow-down path of the ball.

  The second flow channel forming means 4163 is a semi-formed portion 4163a opened toward the back side to form a front side surface of the flow-down path, and a ball is allowed to pass in the front-rear direction at the right end of the semi-formed portion 4163a A plurality of detection sensors having a through hole 4163b provided so as to communicate with the lower end of the semi-formed portion 161a, and a detection port in which a sphere fitted to the semi-formed portion 4163 a and allowed to flow downward A tension designed for the purpose of forming a frame portion around the detection openings of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 in order to arrange the detection openings of SC1 and SC2 and their detection sensors SC1 and SC2 near the center of the flow-down path A protrusion 4163c and a plurality of insertion holes 4163d configured to be inserted into the specific columnar fastening portion 161c and the columnar fastening portion 162c according to the arrangement by being bored at the left and right ends are provided.

  The overhanging portion 4163c is formed such that the back surface side that receives the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 has a width that is slightly longer than the thickness dimension of the frame of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2, and is correspondingly overhang-formed on the front side.

  The portion of the overhanging portion 4163 overhanging to the front side is disposed in the recessed portion 161e of the base member 161 in a state where the right rendering unit 4160 is assembled. That is, the recessed portion 161e is likely to occur when the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 are disposed as in the present embodiment, in addition to the application in which the plate-like adjustment member 165 described in the first embodiment is disposed. It can utilize for the use which arrange | positions the overhang part 4163c.

  The switching device 4164 has a back closing part 4164a having a plate-like surface closing the half forming part 4163a from the back side, and a ball guiding part 4164b projecting from the right end of the back closing part 4164a in a front surface side in a triangular shape. A switch configured to be able to move back and forth forward and backward at the upper position of the receiving recess 4164c recessed for the purpose of receiving the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 at the lower end of the back surface closing portion 4164a and the receiving recess 4164a on the detection sensor SC1 side A valve 4164d, a solenoid 4164e for driving the switching valve 4164d, a plurality of insertion holes 4164f configured to be insertable through fastening screws screwed into the specific columnar fastening portion 161c and the columnar fastening portion 162c, and a second flow passage And a plurality of insertion holes 4164g configured to allow insertion of a fastening screw screwed into the configuration means 4163.

  After passing through the through hole 4163b, the ball flows down between the semi-formed portion 4163a and the back surface closed portion 4164a. That is, the flow-down path of the ball is formed between the through hole 4163 b and the back closing portion 4164 a.

  The ball guiding portion 4164b is disposed close to the inner surface on the right side of the through hole 4163b, and can guide the ball having passed through the through hole 4163b with the inclined surface on the front side. This can prevent the balls from staying on the back side of the through hole 4163 b.

  The switching valve 4164d is placed above the detection sensor SC1 and changes its state in a restricted state for restricting the ball entering the detection sensor SC1, and a guiding state for guiding the ball from above the detection sensor SC1 to the retreating sensor SC1. Do.

  That is, when the solenoid 4164e is in the non-excitation state, the switching valve 4164d is in the restriction state, and the ball flowing down the flow-down path enters the detection sensor SC2. On the other hand, in the state where the solenoid 4164e is excited, the switching valve 4164d is brought into the guiding state, and the ball flowing down the flowing path enters the detection sensor SC1.

  The detection sensors SC1 and SC2 are different from the detection sensors (not shown) for the winning balls disposed in the vicinity of the specific winning hole 65a (upstream of the first flow path member 162), and detect the passage of the balls. And a non-specific area which does not change to the player's advantageous state even if the passage of a ball is detected.

  That is, the switching valve 4164d is set to be changeable in a plurality of patterns in correspondence with the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a. For example, in the first state change pattern, the solenoid 4164e is de-excited at the timing when the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a reaches the switching valve 4164d, and the ball enters the detection sensor SC2 (non-specific area) In the second state change pattern, the solenoid 4164e is excited when the ball entering the specified winning opening 65a reaches the switching valve 4164d, and the ball is detected by the detection sensor SC1 (specific area) It is controlled to enter the ball.

  In this manner, the ball can be controlled to enter either of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 by setting the pattern of the state change of the switching valve 4164d, and the profit obtained by the player can be changed. The playability which can be comprised can be comprised.

  The recessed portion 161e can be used as a portion for arranging the overhang portion 4163c in the present embodiment or as a portion for arranging the adjustment member 165 of the first embodiment, so the pachinko machine 10 of different game characteristics is used. It can be easily configured.

  That is, even in the case where the pachinko machine 10 constitutes a playability that can be realized by arranging the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 in the flow-down path as in the present embodiment, detection is performed to detect a winning ball in the flow-down path FL1. Even when the additional detection sensor other than the sensor is unnecessary, the base member 161 can be diverted when the pachinko machine 10 is configured. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced compared to the case of newly designing and manufacturing a mold for manufacturing the base member 161.

  When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 4164f is fastened and fixed to the specified columnar fastening portion 161c or the columnar fastening portion 162c, no fastening force is applied to the second flow path forming means 4163, and the second flow path forming means 4163 is configured to be slightly displaceable in the front-rear direction. That is, while the second flow path configuration means 4163 is configured to be positionable by inserting the specific columnar fastening portion 161c and the columnar fastening portion 162c into the insertion hole 4163d, the position is not fixed. Ru.

  The switching device 4164 and the second flow path forming means 4163 are fixed to each other by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 4164 g into the second flow path forming means 4163. Thereby, the flow passage shape on the downstream side of the through hole 4163 b can be defined by the forming accuracy of the second flow passage forming means 4163 and the switching device 4164, and the large base member 161 or the first flow passage member 162 It is possible to avoid being influenced by the molding accuracy.

  As a result, with respect to a portion (downstream from the through hole 4163b) where it is necessary to maintain the accuracy of the channel shape high to affect the player's profit, the requirement of the molding accuracy is increased while the other portions ( The requirement for the molding accuracy of the base member 161 and the first flow path member 162 that constitute the flow path on the upstream side of the through hole 4163 b can be suppressed low. That is, desired game characteristics can be realized while reducing the number of parts for which high molding accuracy is required.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the fixing portion 718 is fixed and the guide portion 765 and the connector portion 764a are configured to be displaceable in the fixing position of the electrical wiring DK2 has been described, but the second embodiment of the fifth embodiment In operation unit 5700, fixing shape portion 5718 is configured to be displaceable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  64 to 67 are front views of the second operation unit 5700 in the fifth embodiment. FIGS. 64 to 67 illustrate the displacement base member 720 of the second operation unit 5700 being displaced from the rising end position to the falling end position in time series. In FIG. 64 to FIG. 67, the illustration of the electric decoration substrate 764, the decoration member 768 and the rendering means 780 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

  In FIG. 64, the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the rising end position, and in FIG. 65, the displacement base member 720 is disposed at an intermediate position between the rising end position and the lowering end position. 66 and 67, the displacement base member 720 is shown in the lowered end position.

  In FIG. 67, the state in which the supported means 760 is raised and displaced as compared to the state shown in FIG. 65 is illustrated. That is, compared with the inclination angle of the supported means 760 with respect to the horizontal line in the state shown in FIG. 65, the inclination angle of the supported means 760 with respect to the horizontal line is larger in the state shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the left and right end upper stoppers 5717 and the fixing shape portion 5718 are formed as separate members from the fixed base member 5701, and the left and right end upper stoppers 5717 and the fixing shape portion are formed at the left end of the fixed base member 5701. A solenoid SOL 51 for generating a driving force for vertically displacing the 5718 is disposed.

  The left and right end upper stoppers 5717 in the non-energized state (non-excitation state) when the solenoid SOL 51 is not energized are the upper side surfaces of the driven displacement member 773 in the state where the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the rising end position. And a position where it can abut (downward position).

  On the other hand, the left and right end upper stoppers 5717 in a state (excitation state) in which the solenoid SOL51 is energized are disposed at a position (raised position) raised from the lowered position, as shown in FIG. Thus, the left and right end upper stoppers 5717 are configured to be displaceable between the lowered position and the raised position.

  The displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 associated with the displacement of the second operation unit 5700 will be described. In the displacement from FIG. 64 to FIG. 65, the distance between the fixing shape portion 5718 to which the electrical wiring DK2 is fixed and the path portion 765b disposed in the vicinity of the connector portion 464a to which the electrical wiring DK2 is fixed is shortened. It is changing. Therefore, the electric wiring DK2 is in a state in which it is likely to be over-displaced downward due to the inertial force generated by the downward displacement of the displacement base member 720.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 66, as described above, in addition to the electric wiring DK2 in the vicinity of the path portion 765b being pulled upward by the posture change of the supported means 760, the solenoid SOL51 is energized and the fixing shape portion 5718 As a result of the upward displacement, the portion fixed to the fixing shape portion 5718 of the electrical wiring DK2 is pulled upward. Therefore, excessive displacement to the lower side of the electrical wiring DK2 can be firmly suppressed.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 67, the energization of the solenoid SOL51 is canceled in accordance with the timing at which the length of the electric wiring DK2 drawn to the center increases. Thus, the fixing shape portion 5718 can be disposed immediately on the left of the path portion 765b of the supported means 760.

  Therefore, the distance between the fixing shape portion 5718 and the path portion 765b can be shortened as compared with the case where the fixing shape portion 5718 is disposed at the obliquely upper position of the path portion 765b. Thereby, it can be avoided that the tensile force applied to the electrical wiring DK2 becomes excessive, and the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 can be prevented from being lowered.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

  Although the case where the light irradiated from the light source arrange | positioned at the back side of the center frame 86 passes to the front side through the flat part 86a was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the substrate may be directly fixed to the center frame 86, and light emitted from light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the substrate may pass through the flat plate portion 86a to the front side.

  In the first embodiment, the flat plate portion 86a is formed in a smooth surface, and the light transmittance is good. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light diffusion shape may be formed on the flat plate portion 86a. Accordingly, since the flat plate portion 86a can be made to emit light easily on the surface, it is possible to execute good emission effects while reducing the number of light emitting means such as LEDs.

  Although the case where the base board 60 was formed as a wooden member was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the base plate 60 may be formed of a light transmitting resin material.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the boundary wall 86b as a portion blocking the player's line of sight protrudes at a right angle from the front of the base plate 60 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the boundary wall 86 b may be configured to project in a direction (for example, obliquely upward direction) having a component in the surface direction of the base plate 60. In this case, the shielded range SE1 can be widely secured.

  In the first embodiment, the boundary wall 86b is formed as a wall extending in the same width in the form of a band, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be formed in a strip shape in which the width of the boundary wall 86b is changed depending on the position. In this case, the size of the shielding range SE1 for each arrangement can be easily adjusted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the player's field of vision is blocked by the boundary wall 86b has been described. However, any means may be used as long as the means is disposed on the near side of the game area. For example, it may be a light guide plate (LED light guide panel) or a movable part.

  The movable part is disposed, for example, on the rear side of the center frame 86 in the standby state, and in the operating state, protrudes toward the center frame 86 to the front side, and the front side or rear side of the glass unit 16 is the center frame 86. It may be displaced toward the outer side of the front view. At this time, the plurality of glass units 2016 may be displaced, disposed on the front side of the center frame 2086, and configured to block the line of sight of the player directed to the center frame 2086.

  In addition, the means arrange | positioned to to-be-shielded area SE1 is not limited at all. For example, a switching device (e.g., switching device 4164) may be disposed to switch whether or not the gaming ball enters a specific area (an area that can change to a state advantageous to the player by entering the ball). A second winning opening 640 having an electric part 640a and a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning opening 65a may be disposed. In this case, the player's line of sight may be blocked (partially) at a timing when the gaming ball can enter the specific area, the second winning opening 640, or the specific winning opening 65a to make it difficult to visually recognize. In this case, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the specific area, the second winning opening 640, and the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the ridge portion 155 is formed on the lower plate portion 152 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower plate portion 152 may protrude in a granular manner. In this case, since it is possible to easily generate a load in the front-rear direction on the flowing ball, the decelerating effect of the ball can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, although the case where the ridge portion 155 which produces the deceleration action is provided to project upward from the lower surface portion has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to protrude from the base plate 60 toward the front side, or a member may be provided on the side of the glass unit 16 so as to protrude from the member to the back side. Further, the arrangement of the projecting shape portion is not limited to the left side of the game area, and may be arranged in the right-handed flow path.

  Although the case where the cross-sectional shape of the protrusion part 155 is the same was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, it may be formed in a shape (taper shape) in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the back side. In this case, since it is possible to apply a front-side load to the ball, the discharge of the ball from the out port 71 can be delayed. In addition, the magnitude relationship between the cross-sectional shapes may be reversed. In this case, the balls can be quickly discharged from the out port 71.

  In the former case, the draft on the front side when resin molding the ridge portion 155 can be formed by the shape of the ridge portion 155. In the latter case, although it is difficult to form by die-cut to the front side, in the first embodiment, since the ball guiding member 154 is separately formed and the upper side of the protruding portion 155 is open, It can be easily manufactured by die cutting on the upper surface side.

  If the die cutting on the upper surface side is taken into consideration, the degree of freedom of the shape of the protruding portion 155 can be improved. For example, the side in which the cross-sectional shape of the above-mentioned taper shape is large can be made into a shape which alternates between adjacent ridges. In this case, since it is possible to give a reaction force which is repeatedly reversed back and forth to the gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the projection 155, stability of the flow of the gaming ball can be enhanced. Also, for example, the protrusion 155 may not be a protrusion that extends in the front-rear direction, but may be a protrusion that extends diagonally, or a protrusion that extends in a wavelike manner along the longitudinal direction of the lower plate 152 It is good also as an article.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the second protrusion 157 applies an obliquely upward load to the ball in contact from the downstream side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the ball can be made to abut on the right side portion 156c by forming the bottom plate portion 152 to be connected to the right end of the second protrusion 157 by the radius of the ball and forming the bottom shape, Can be given a right-facing load. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid the situation where a ball runs up the 2nd projected part 157.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion 157 on the downstream side of the first protrusion 156 is smaller has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion 157 on the downstream side may be larger than that of the first protrusion 156. In this case, the ball can be easily retained at the position between the first protrusion 156 and the second protrusion 157.

  In the first embodiment, the upper surface of the protruding portion 155 is described as being a smooth surface on which light is easily reflected. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light diffusing shape may be formed on the surface. In this case, the top surface of the protrusion 155 can be surface-emitted, and the power of attention of the protrusion 155 can be improved.

  Although the case where the light reflected by the opposing plate portion 153 is visually recognized by the player has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a reflecting member having a mirror finish may be disposed on the front of the opposing plate portion 153.

  Further, separate light emitting means for lighting the left rendering unit 150 may be provided. For example, a (highly rigid or flexible) electric decoration substrate is provided in a gap between the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 (the recess on the back side of the ridge portion 155 may be used), and the electric decoration substrate The light may be emitted to the inside of the game area by the light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the right. Alternatively, an electric decoration substrate may be provided on the electric role object 640a and light may be emitted to the left and right outside of the electric effect body 640a. May be configured to be irradiated.

  In this case, by configuring the light to be emitted toward the general winning opening 63, the shadow of the ball flowing down near the general winning opening 63 can be extended upward, so that the area is larger than the area of the ball. Since the presence of a ball flowing down near the general winning opening 63 can be confirmed, the presence of the ball can be enhanced.

  Further, since the shadow of the general winning opening 63 can be extended upward, two different types of shadows, that is, the shadow (static) and the shadow of the ball (motion) can be visually recognized, and the presence of the general winning opening 63 Can make you stand out. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the general winning opening 63.

  Moreover, a separate light emission means is not restricted to when arrange | positioned by an electric decoration board | substrate. For example, the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 are applied in such a manner that a conductive adhesive is applied to the gap between the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 and the conductive adhesive and the contact point of the LED are fixed. The LEDs may be disposed in the gaps between the two, and the LEDs may be made to emit light by energizing the conductive adhesive. In this case, the function can be realized as long as there is only a gap where the LEDs can be arranged, and thus the design freedom of the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the ball is guided from the left and right to the out port 71 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both left and right sides of the out port 71 may be opened, and balls may flow into the out port 71 from both left and right sides.

  In the first embodiment, the case where light is reflected on the front side of the opposing plate portion 153 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, even if light emitted from a member (for example, the first operation unit 400) disposed on the back side of the general winning opening 63 passes through the general winning opening 63 and reaches the ball guiding member 154 good. In this case, the light can be refracted downward by using the inclined surface provided inside the ball guiding member 154 for the purpose of smoothing the flow of the ball, and the light and the ridge portion 155 can be reached. Therefore, the projection 155 can be made to emit light without providing a dedicated light emitting means.

  In the first embodiment, although the case where the projecting portion 155 is disposed immediately below the ball guiding member 154 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the ball flowing down the vicinity of the ball guiding member 154 has a component in the left-right direction and the speed is high and it is easy to flow down, the ridge portion 155 is provided at a position overlapping the ball guiding member 154 in the direction of the velocity direction It is good. In this case, the ball can be prevented from landing on the projection 155 even when the ball flows down at a speed having a lateral component.

  In the first embodiment, although the first flow path member 162 and the second flow path member 163 fastened and fixed to the base member 161 constitute the flow-down path FL1 in combination with only the base member 161, It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower portion of the second flow path member 163 extends downward below the lower end portion of the base member 161, and a combination of the extended portion and another flow path member disposed opposite to the down flow path FL1 May be configured.

  Although the case where the adjustment member 165 is comprised by the 1st flow-path member 162 and another member was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the adjustment member 165 and the first flow path member 162 may be configured as an integral body. In this case, the internal shape of the flow-down path FL1 can be maintained by configuring the portion connecting the adjustment member 165 and the first flow path member 162 to pass through the outer side of the flow-down path FL1.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the structure which can fix the adjustment member 165 to the base member 161 in connection with fastening and fixing the 2nd flow path member 163 to the base member 161, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, individual screws for fastening and fixing the adjustment member 165 may be prepared.

  In the first embodiment, as the alignment of the second flow path member 163, the case where the fitting hole 165b is formed in the adjustment member 165 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, instead of the fitting hole 165b or in addition to the fitting hole 165b, a wall portion that can contact the outer surface of the second flow path member 163 from the back surface of the adjustment member 165 may be formed. As a result, the load received from the ball flowing down the flow-down path FL1 can be shared by the wall portion as well, so deformation of the second flow path member 163 can be prevented. In addition, by forming no wall portion on the inner surface side of the second flow path member 163, it is possible to secure the cross-sectional area of the region that constitutes the flow-down path FL1.

  In the first embodiment, the back surface of the base member 161 and the back surface of the adjustment member 165 are flush with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the adjustment member 165 may be configured to have a dimensional relationship in which it protrudes from the back surface of the base member 161. In this case, when the second flow path member 163 is fastened and fixed to the base member 161, a compressive load can be applied to the adjusting member 165, so that the positional stability of the adjusting member 165 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation unit 500 for accommodating and displacing the drive motor 541 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement mode of the accessory that accommodates and displaces the drive device may be slide displacement, displacement combining rotational displacement and slide displacement, or other complex displacement.

  Although the case where the drive motor 541 is disposed inside the rotating body 560 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fixed to the back side of the rotating body 560, and may be configured to be vertically displaced in accordance with the vertical displacement of the rotating unit 500. Also in this case, the rotary body 560 can be configured to hide the drive motor 541 in a front view. On the other hand, according to this configuration, the drive motor 541 having a diameter larger than the diameter of the rotating body 560 can be employed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 547 is disposed on the opposite side to the left and right of the drive motor 541 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the detection sensor 547 may be disposed on the left side, the detection sensor 547 may be disposed outside the rotating body 560, or a drive motor having a function of omitting the disposition of the detection sensor 547 and determining an angle. 541 may be adopted.

  Although the case where the arrangement angle of the detection sensor 547 does not change by fixing the detection sensor 547 indirectly to the U-shaped metal plate 511 has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the arrangement angle of the detection sensor 547 may be configured to be changeable by supporting the U-shaped metal plate 511 rotatably and displaceably. In this case, control for detecting a plurality of postures (two postures in the present embodiment, corresponding to the case of being disposed at the rising position and the case of being disposed at the lowering position) as the posture of the rotating body 560 is diverted. The appearance of the rotating body 560 can be increased. That is, since the stop position (stop angle) of the rotating body 560 viewed from the player changes with the change of the arrangement angle of the detection sensor 547, the visual recognition mode can be changed.

  The rotational displacement of the U-shaped metal plate 511 (the change in the arrangement angle of the detection line s 547) may be configured to be executable independently of the upper and lower positions of the rotating body 560. It may be configured to be executable in conjunction with the vertical displacement (depending on the vertical position).

  Although the case where the rotating shaft of the rotation unit 500 faces in the left-right direction has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis may be configured to face in the front-rear direction or the up-down direction, or the direction of the rotation axis may be configured to be changeable.

  Although the case where the electrical wiring DK1 is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the electrical wiring DK1 may be fixed with an adhesive tape, or may be fixed with an adhesive or the like.

  In the first embodiment, the fixed position (lower extending portion 519 and the wiring support portion 465) of the electric wiring DK1 arranged below the rotation unit 500 is arranged on the same plane orthogonal to the left and right direction. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fixed position of the electrical wiring DK1 may be disposed out of position in the left-right direction. In this case, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 can be made higher than when the electric wiring DK1 is arranged on the same plane, and the state change of the winding manner can be easily generated in the electric wiring DK1. . That is, since the electric wiring DK1 easily changes in a spiral state, the rotation unit 500 is disposed at the lowered position, and when the fixed positions are brought close to each other, the diameter of the arc formed by the electric wiring DK1 that is curved is reduced. Since the reaction force received from the belt-like extension portion 463 can be reduced, the load received by the electrical wiring DK1 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation unit 500 is vertically displaced is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement direction of the rotation unit 500 may be displacement in the front-rear direction, displacement in the left-right direction, or displacement in an oblique direction.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the guide cylindrical portion 423 is inserted only into the columnar member 431 on the front side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the arrangement of the guide cylindrical portion 423 may be omitted, or the guide cylindrical portion 423 may be arranged on both of the pair of columnar members 431.

  In this case, the arrangement form of the guide cylindrical portion 423 may be different for each of the compound operation units 402 arranged in four sets of right and left. For example, when the rotation unit 500 is driven in correspondence with the number of holding balls, the combined operation unit 402 corresponding to the small number of holding balls has the number of operations compared to the combined operation unit 402 corresponding to the large number of holding balls. Since the operation frequency is high, it is assumed that it is likely to deteriorate early.

  Therefore, only the compound operation unit 402 (compound operation unit 402 at the left end) corresponding to the smallest holding ball number has the guide cylindrical portion 423 disposed on both of the pair of columnar members 431. In order to reduce the number, the other tubular unit 402 may be provided with the guide cylindrical portion 423 only on the columnar member 431 on the front side. This makes it possible to reduce the difference between the service life of the leftmost compound operation unit 402 and the life of the other compound operation units 402.

  In the first embodiment, the front and rear surfaces of the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b are formed to be flat, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a curved surface. In addition, although the case where the crossing position of the extension line 517x is arranged to be biased to the right with respect to the center of the deformed hole 517 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the crossing position of the extension line 517 x may be disposed at the center of the deformed hole 517.

  Although the case where the positioning pin 516c is disposed in the range between the pair of extension lines 517x has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the positioning pin 516c may be disposed outside (e.g., to the left of the fastening portion 516b) in the range between the pair of extension lines 517x. In this case, the arrangement width of the electrical wiring DK1 can be secured.

  Although the case where the fastening portion 517a of the guide member 516 is divided and disposed is described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the deformed holes 517 may be arranged in a divided manner. In this case, in the case where there are a plurality of electrical wires passing through the profiled holes 517, they can be supported by divided separate openings. Thus, for example, it is easy to guide the wire disposed on the upper side through the deformed hole 517 in the left and right directions of the guide member 516.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the fastening portion 517a protrudes inward of the deformed hole 517 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b may be formed from a circular opening having the fastening portion 517a omitted, and the fastening portion may be disposed outside the opening. In this case, since the passage area of the electrical wiring DK1 can be expanded, the upper limit value of the total cross-sectional area of the electrical wiring DK1 can be increased.

  In the first embodiment, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b is formed up to the middle position in the depth direction of the deformed hole 517, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the same shape as the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b may be formed to pass through the deformed hole 517.

  In the first embodiment, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517 b as the fan-shaped recessed portion is formed in the deformed hole 517, but the shape of the recessed portion is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front and rear walls may be a substantially rectangular recess extending in parallel with the left and right direction. In this case, the load received by the electrical wiring DK1 disposed in the recess can be reduced.

  Further, in this case, when the member connected to the electrical wiring DK1 is displaced in the left-right direction, the displacement in the left-right direction of the electric wiring DK1 associated with the displacement can be guided by the recessed portion. That is, since the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 can be guided by the recessed portion, the load applied to the electrical wiring DK1 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b is formed as a single piece, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of fan-shaped adjusting portions 517 b can be arbitrarily set, and may be two, three, or four.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the detection portion 577 is configured to have a shape in which the annular projecting portion is divided is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protruding proximal end side of the detection target 577 may be in a shape that is not divided. In this case, since the rigidity of the detection target 577 can be improved, the rigidity of the rotating right cover 570 can be improved, and as a result, the rigidity of the rotating body 560 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 includes the drive motor 541 and the rotating portion (the rotating body 560, the rotating left plate 550, the motor gear 542 meshed with the rotating left plate 550, and the driven plate 575 of the rotating right cover portion 570). Although the case where it does not contact | abut) was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the electric wiring DK1 may be in contact with at least one of the drive motor 541 or the rotating portion.

  In the first embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is supported by the right fixing bush 522, and the driven plate 575 fixed to the rotating body 560 is supported by the posture fixing bush 571, whereby the electrical wiring DK1 and the rotating body 560 are metal. Although the case where it was not directly supported by the member was described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the electrical wiring DK1 or the rotating body 560 may be directly supported by the metal member (for example, the U-shaped metal plate 511).

  In the first embodiment, the front lid member 762 is formed of an annular member, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the ring may be formed of a C-shaped member which is divided halfway.

  Although the case where the front lid member 762 is fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 720 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement base member 720 may be rotatably supported. In this case, the front cover member 762 can be driven by the displacement of the electrical wiring DK 3 by the rotation of the front cover member 762.

  In the first embodiment, although the description has been made of the case where the supported means 760 is changed in posture, and the displacing base member 720 which is moved up and down is configured not to change in posture, this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement base member 720 and the supported means 760 may be integrally configured, and both the displacement base member 720 and the supported means 760 may be configured to be changeable in posture.

  In the first embodiment, although the case where the supported means 760 on both the left and right sides changes in posture has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the posture of the left supported means 760L to which the electric wiring DK2 is guided changes, the posture of the right supported means 760R may not change. Even in this case, it is possible to reduce the tensile load applied to the electrical wiring DK2.

  In this case, a driving device that generates a driving force for changing the posture of the shaft support means 760R may be provided. Thereby, a plurality of operation modes can be configured in the case where the posture of the supported means 760R changes with the vertical displacement of the displacement base member 720, and in the case where the posture of the supported means 760 is maintained.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the supported means 760 changes in posture with respect to the displacement base member 720 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a slide member that slides relative to the up and down displacement of the displacement base member 720 in the opposite direction may be connected to the displacement base member 720, and the electrical wiring DK2 may be connected to the slide member. Even in this case, the amount of displacement of the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 is suppressed when the displacement base member 720 is vertically displaced by the same distance as compared to the case where the electrical wiring DK2 is connected to the displacement base member 720. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is guided through the opening 714a disposed on the left side of the fixed base member 701 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the electric wire DK2 passing through the opening 714a on the left side may be connected to the supported means 760L on the left side, and the electric wire passing through the opening 714a on the right side may be connected to the supported means 760R on the right side . In this case, electricity can be supplied to the right supported means 760R without passing through the rendering means 780.

  Furthermore, by forming the guide portion 765 on the right side pivot support means 760R, the configuration of the pivot support means 760L and 760R can be easily designed to be symmetrical in terms of function. In addition, when the right side opening 714a is not passed through the electrical wiring, the formation of the right side opening 714a may be omitted. Thereby, the rigidity of the right side cylindrical overhanging portion 714 can be strengthened.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the supported means 760 is supported at the end in the longitudinal direction has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be supported near the center instead of the end, or may be supported by another part.

  Although the case where electric wiring DK1, DK2, and DK3 were comprised from one or several harness which has several electric wire was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, one or more flat cables may be used. In this case, by making the directions in which the electric wires DK1, DK2, and DK3 can be displaced coincide with the direction in which the flat cable becomes thin (thickness direction), the load upon displacement of the flat cable can be reduced.

  Although the case where the to-be-detected part 745a is formed in the end gear 745 one place was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the detection target portion 745a may be formed at a plurality of locations (a plurality of angular positions can be detected). Thereby, for example, different stop positions are detected such as a drive stop position at the time of control to raise the pivoting arm member 743 to the end position and a drive stop position at the time of control to perform reciprocating elevating operation using own weight. be able to.

  In the first embodiment described above, the first operation unit 400 is configured to stand by at the lower position and configured to move upward, and the second operation unit 700 is configured to stand by at the upper position and configured to move downward. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of each unit may be reversed, or may be laterally displaced.

  Although the case where the shape of the spring cover SC1 is fixed has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spring cover SC1 may be formed in a bellows shape, and may be configured to be vertically displaceable. In this case, by connecting the lower end of the spring cover SC1 to the upper end portion of the rendering means 780, the spring cover SC1 can be expanded and contracted vertically while the coil spring SP1 is hidden by the spring cover SC1. For example, by drawing a decorative pattern on the front surface of the spring cover SC1, an effect of changing the appearance of the decorative pattern can be performed as the spring cover SC1 expands and contracts.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the dedicated solenoid 2086 d for driving the decorative member 2086 f is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the decorative member 2086f is designed to be capable of coming into contact with the upper end portion of the rendering means 780, and the decorative member 2086f is displaced by applying a load to the decorative member 2086f as the rendering means 780 is displaced. good. In this case, the drive motor 731 is also used as a device for generating a drive force for displacing the decorative member 2086f, whereby a dedicated drive device (corresponding to the solenoid 2086d) can be omitted.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the decorative member 2086 f is rotationally displaced by the rotation axis along the left-right direction has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be configured to slide and displace along the front surface direction (upper and lower, left and right directions) of the base plate 60, or may be configured to be displaced in the front and rear direction. It may be configured as follows.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement base member 3720 is disposed in the assembly preparation position by releasing the connection with the pivoting arm member 3743 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement base member 3720 may be arranged in the assembly preparation position by enlarging the elongated opening 723 or the transmission hole 744.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the posture change of the displacement base member 3720 can be corrected by abutting the roller member 3729 to the left and right extending portion SC3c has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement base member 3720 may be decelerated by the contact between the roller member 3729 and the left and right extension SC3c. A flexible cushion member may be disposed on the lower side of the left and right extension SC3c to reduce the impact upon contact.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is connected after the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide concave portion SC3b of the spring cover SC3 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the roller member 3729 may be engaged with the guide recessed portion SC3b of the spring cover SC3 in a state where the connection of the electrical wiring DK2 is completed.

  In this case, the distance between the fixing shape portion 718 for fixing the electrical wiring DK2 and the path portion 765b is the longest, and there is a possibility that an extra load may be applied to the electrical wiring DK2. The unit 5718 may be used. That is, the distance between the fixing positions of the electric wiring DK2 can be shortened by arranging the fixing shape portions 5718 at the lowering positions of the left and right end upper stoppers 5717 at the time of assembling.

  In the third embodiment, the case is described in which the rendering means 780 is assembled after the small diameter collar C3 is fastened and fixed (after the displacement base member 3720 and the pivoting arm member 3748 are connected). It is not limited. For example, by assembling the member for connecting the displacement base member 3720 and the pivoting arm member 3748 by screwing in the fastening screw from the back side, the displacement base member 3720 is assembled after the rendering means 780 is assembled. And the pivot arm 3748 can be connected.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the guide recess SC3b is formed along the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a wave shape extending in the vertical direction. In this case, the effect of displacing the displacement base member 3720 in the left-right direction can be performed in accordance with the vertical displacement of the displacement base member 3720. In this case, the metal slide rail 711 is preferably omitted.

  The ball guiding portion 4164b described in the fourth embodiment may be disposed at the upstream side position of the semi-forming portion 163a of the second flow path member 163 described in the first embodiment. Thereby, it can be avoided that the gaming balls bridged from the first flow path member 162 to the second flow path member 163 stay.

  In the fifth embodiment, the fixing shape portion 5718 is moved up and down in conjunction with the left and right end upper stoppers 5717. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fixing shape portion 5718 may be vertically displaced. In this case, it is unnecessary to take measures against the positional deviation of the left and right end upper stoppers 5717.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the fixing shape portion 5718 is controlled to move upward after the passage portion 765b passes through the left and right positions of the fixing shape portion 5718 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. is not. For example, the fixing shape portion 5718 may be controlled so as to ascend and shift at a timing when the degree of relaxation of the electrical wiring DK2 is maximized (a timing when the path portion 765b is arranged at the left and right positions of the fixing shape portion 5718). . In this case, since the upward load applied to the electrical wiring DK2 can be generated from an early stage, the upward load can be gently applied to the electrical wiring DK2.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the fixing shape portion 5718 is lifted and displaced by the driving force of the solenoid SOL 51 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the drive force (drive force of the drive motor 731) transmitted via transmission means such as a gear interlocked with the displacement of another member (for example, the pivot arm member 743) displaced by the drive force of the drive motor 731 It may be configured to be displaced.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, the timing for moving the fixing shape portion 5718 up and down is controlled to coincide with the timing when the load given to the electric wiring DK2 tends to be excessive, but the control is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, according to the drive period of the drive motor 731, the solenoid SOL 51 may always be interlocked.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Technical thought to reduce displacement of electric wiring by displacement of movable parts>
In the gaming machine, including a displacement means configured to be displaceable and an electrical wiring connected to the displacement means, a section in which the displacement means is displaced includes a section that is displaced so as to reduce a load on the electrical wiring. A game machine A1 characterized by.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, by placing the electrical wiring guided by the displacement means along the auxiliary means connected to the displacement means and configured to be displaceable, an excessive burden is placed on the electrical wiring when the displacement means is displaced. There is a gaming machine which is configured to suppress such a problem (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the number of members disposed in a portion where the player can not see increases because auxiliary means which is not originally recognized by the player is required.

  In addition, when the auxiliary means is broken, the load on the electrical wiring can not be suppressed, so that it is necessary to secure the strength of the auxiliary means, and there is a problem that the product cost is easily increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement means displaces so as to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring, thereby reducing the displacement amount of the electrical wiring itself or suppressing the excessive displacement of the electrical wiring. Can avoid the need for separate assistance means while preventing the

  In addition, the specific example of an auxiliary | assistant means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a binding band capable of temporarily holding electrical wiring, or may be a silicon resin cover or tube surrounding the periphery of the electric wiring.

  Moreover, the aspect which reduces the load which concerns on electrical wiring is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode of reducing the displacement (at least a part) of the electrical wiring, or a mode of increasing the displacement (at least a part) of the electrical wiring.

  In the gaming machine A1, the electric wiring is positioned at a predetermined portion outside the displacement means, and the displacement means includes a guiding portion to which the electric wiring is guided, and the distance between the guiding portion and the predetermined portion A game machine A2 characterized in that it is displaceable to reduce changes in

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the degree of freedom of the displacement mode of the displacement means can be improved as compared to the case where the entire displacement means is displaced to reduce the displacement of the electrical wiring. .

  The gaming machine A1 or A2 includes a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means toward the displacement means, and the electric wiring includes the displacement means. A game machine A3 that is disposed on the opposite side of the transmission means as a reference.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, no electrical wiring is disposed between the displacing means and the transmitting means, or there is no need to provide a structure for holding the electrical wiring in the transmitting means Therefore, the space between the displacement means and the transmission means can be narrowed, and a space on the front side of the displacement means can be secured.

  Thus, the freedom of design of the displacement means can be enhanced, so that the displacement means is not effectively used as a simple wiring concealment with low designability but with a high effect of rendering effect provided with a three-dimensional design. Can.

  The gaming machine A3 includes an intermediate means displaceably supported by the transmission means, the intermediate means displaceably supporting the displacement means, and the displacement of the displacement means is at least the direction of the displacement of the intermediate means. A game machine A4 characterized by including a displacement of an aspect directed to the opposite side of the game machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, while the electric wiring is concealed on one side of the displacement means, the other side of the displacement means is supported by the intermediate means. It is possible to improve the selection freedom of the displacement amount of the means. In other words, the amount of displacement when the intermediate means is displaced away from the electrical wiring can be offset by the displacement of the displacement means.

  In the gaming machine A4, the transmitting means includes rapid stopping means for rapidly stopping the intermediate means after high speed displacement.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the intermediate means can be rapidly stopped, the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the intermediate means can be generated using the inertia of the displacement means.

  Furthermore, even when the intermediate means is suddenly stopped, the electric wiring flows by inertia in the direction in which the intermediate means was displaced before the rapid stop of the intermediate means. It can be suppressed by (fishing). Thereby, the displacement of the electrical wiring can be reduced.

  In the game machine A4 or A5, the electric wiring is guided to the displacement means on the side where the transmission means is disposed with reference to the displacement direction of the intermediate means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the electric wiring can be guided to the displacement means on the upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force with reference to the displacement direction of the intermediate means Even in the case of displacement in an unexpected displacement mode (even in the case of malfunction), the displacement amount of the electrical wiring can be easily suppressed.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the displacement means includes a guide portion to which the electric wiring is guided, a base member having the guide portion, and a substrate provided on the base member, A game machine A7 characterized in that the unit is arranged so as not to hide the substrate in a first direction view.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring guided by the guiding portion from interfering with the rendering effect of the substrate.

<Technical thought that the motor is disposed inside the rotating means>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotating means configured to be rotatable about a predetermined axis and a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the rotating means, a detecting means configured to be capable of detecting the position of the rotating means A game machine B1, comprising: the detection means is disposed inward of the rotation means in a first direction view.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine comprising a plurality of rotating means and a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the plurality of rotating means (see, for example, JP 2007-130261A). ). However, although the conventional gaming machine described above achieves some space saving by rotating the plurality of rotating means by the driving force generated from the single driving means, it is more than the outer edge of the rotating means in front view Since the driving means and the detecting means are disposed outside, another shielding part for shielding them is required, and there is a problem that the apparatus provided with the rotating means is enlarged in the first direction.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the detection means is disposed inward of the rotation means in the first direction view, the detection means can be hidden by the rotation means, so only the detection means is shielded. It is possible to eliminate the need for a separate shielding part and to miniaturize the device.

  Moreover, since detection means corresponding to each rotation means can be provided while avoiding upsizing in the first direction, the freedom of presentation can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the detection means is provided on the inner side of the rotation means in the first direction view, the freedom of the effect performed by rotating or stopping the rotation means can be improved while maintaining the device in a small size. .

  A game machine B2 comprising: support means for rotatably supporting the rotation means, the support means supporting the drive means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the number of members can be reduced by using the supporting means for supporting the rotating means for supporting the driving means.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driving means is accommodated inside the rotating means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, space can be saved outside the rotation means.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the detection means is configured to be capable of detecting a change in the rotational direction position of the rotation means, and is disposed inside the rotation means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the visibility of the rotating means is improved in comparison with the case where the detecting means is disposed outside the rotating means. can do.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the detection means is disposed on the downstream side of the transmission path of the driving force of the drive means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the middle of the transmission path of the driving force as compared with the case where the detection means is arranged on the upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force. When an abnormality occurs (for example, when the rotating means is torn and the driving force is transmitted only to the upstream side), the occurrence of the abnormality can be easily detected early by the detecting means.

  In this case, when the detection means is disposed at the downstream end of the transmission path of the driving force, even if an abnormality occurs in any part of the transmission path, the abnormality can be detected early. it can.

  In addition, as an aspect of abnormality, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode in which the rotating body formed by connecting the divided bodies is broken halfway and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, or the gear is broken in the mechanism in which the driving force is transmitted by the gear or the frictional force It may be an aspect in which friction does not occur or may be an aspect in which the drive means as the upper end portion of the transmission path of the driving force breaks down.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the detection means includes a detection device having a detection portion and a detection portion whose displacement is detected by the detection portion of the detection device, and the rotation means is the detection portion. A game machine B6 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4 or B5, since the detection device can be fixed, the electrical wiring or the like connected to the detection device can be simply configured.

  Further, by directly detecting the displacement of the rotating means, it is possible to reduce the detection error as compared with the case of detecting indirectly.

  In the gaming machine B6, the to-be-detected portion is a protruding portion protruding inward of the rotating means along the rotation direction of the rotating means, and a dividing portion formed as a recessed portion for dividing the protruding portion. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that the projecting portion is longer than the dividing portion.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, it is possible to increase the degree of rigidity enhancement of the rotating means by the projecting portion.

  In any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the electric wire connected to the drive means and limiting means for limiting the arrangement of the electric wire are provided, and the electric wire is connected to the connection part connected to the drive means And a connecting part connected to the connecting part, wherein the limiting means is configured to prevent the connecting part from coming into contact with the driving means or the rotating means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the durability of the electrical wiring can be improved by the limiting means. That is, by avoiding the contact between the drive means and the connection portion of the electrical wiring, it is possible to suppress the deterioration and disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the heat generation from the drive means, and the contact between the rotation means and the connection portion of the electrical wiring By avoiding this, it is possible to suppress deterioration or disconnection of the electrical wiring due to friction.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the game machine comprises a support means for rotatably supporting the rotation means, and an electrical wiring connected to the drive means, the support means being a metal first support member; A game machine B9, comprising: a second support member made of resin; and at least one of the rotating means and the electric wiring is supported by the first support member via the second support member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the first supporting member stably holds the weight of the rotating means and the driving means while facing the rotating means or the electric wiring. It is possible to avoid that the rotating means wears out prematurely or the electrical wiring breaks prematurely, as compared to the case of being directly supported by the first support means.

  In the gaming machine B9, the first support member is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the rotation axis of the rotation means.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B9, it is possible to perform movable effect of displacing the rotation shaft of the rotation means while stabilizing the rotation of the rotation means.

<Structural technical idea of unusual wiring through>
A game machine comprising a wiring support means having an opening through which an electric wiring is inserted, the game machine comprising a restriction means for restricting the movement of the electric wiring inserted through the opening.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured to have an electric wire inserted through a tubular member having an opening (see, for example, JP-A-2015-159837). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the opening portion is formed in a size that allows insertion of the connector of the electrical wiring, and the position in the opening portion of the electrical wiring smaller in diameter than the connector can not be determined. There is a problem that the electrical wiring positions in the state may not be uniform for each product.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, by limiting the movement of the electric wiring by means such as dividing the opening into a plurality of sections by the restriction means, the position of the electric wiring in the opening can be easily determined. Since this can be done, the positions of the electrical wiring can be made uniform.

  In addition, it is not limited at all as an aspect in which the position of the electrical wiring is uniform. For example, the relative position with respect to a predetermined member may be within a predetermined standard for each product, or when the electrical wiring is formed of a bundle, the tendency of the degree to which the bundle disperses (the degree to which the bundle is assembled) is It may be an aspect that is equivalent to each other.

  Further, the shape of the open part is not limited at all. For example, it may be a circular opening, a predetermined number of square openings (triangles or quadrilaterals), or other complex shapes (for example, a star shape).

  In the gaming machine C1, the restriction means includes a plurality of overhangs projecting inward of the opening, and the electric wiring can be disposed between the plurality of overhangs. Game machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the work of inserting the electric wiring into the opening is facilitated compared to the case where the opening is divided into a plurality of partitions provided in the opening. be able to.

  In the gaming machine C2, the wiring support means includes a fixing portion fixed to a guiding means to which the electric wiring is guided, and the fixing portion is disposed in the overhang portion. C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the overhanging portion can also be used to fix the guiding means. Thereby, when fixing the wiring support means to the guiding means, it is possible to avoid sandwiching the electrical wiring between the wiring supporting means and the guiding means.

  In addition, the aspect of a guide means is not limited at all, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, the guiding means may be configured as a part of a plate-like member or may be configured as a columnar member (columnar portion).

  In the gaming machine C3, the guiding means is formed thick in the thickness direction of the wiring supporting means along the shape of the overhanging portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, since the guiding means is formed thick along the shape of the overhanging portion, the guiding path of the electrical wiring disposed between the overhanging portions is While securing, the rigidity of the wiring support means can be secured high.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the guiding means includes a columnar portion extending in a columnar shape in the thickness direction of the overhanging portion.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the columnar portion loosely restricts the arrangement of the electrical wiring, thereby changing the degree of change (for example, the degree of disassembly) of the electrical wiring disposed between the guiding means and the wiring supporting means. It can be gradual (stepwise).

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the wiring support means includes a thick-walled forming portion which is thickly formed on the outer peripheral side from a portion where the overhanging portion is not provided. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the thickness forming portion is reinforced even when the electric wiring is concentrated at a location where the overhanging portion is not provided. By playing a role, it is possible to prevent the wiring support means from being broken or broken.

  In addition, when the wiring support means is supported by a harder member (for example, a metal member) from the outer peripheral side, the thickness-formed portion can be deformed significantly as compared to other portions (thin portions). Therefore, disconnection of the electrical wiring can be easily avoided by arranging the thick portion in a place where the electrical wiring is concentrated.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the wiring support means includes a first wiring support means and a second wiring support means stacked on the first wiring support means, and the first wiring support means A game machine C7 characterized in that the shapes of the first open portion which is the open portion and the second open portion which is the open portion of the second wiring support means are different.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the aspect of the electrical wiring in the first opening (for example, the looseness) and the aspect of the electrical wiring in the second opening By making them different, the aspect of the electrical wiring can be changed stepwise.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily cope with switching of the aspect required for the electrical wiring. For example, in the case of switching between a mode in which a predetermined stable displacement (displacement within a limited range) is required for the electrical wiring and a mode in which no positional displacement is required but position stability in a uniformly dispersed state is required. In addition, the aspect of the electrical wiring can be changed stepwise.

  One of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the wiring support means includes a recessed portion which is recessed wider than the width of the electric wire constituting the electric wiring.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a limit to the extent that the electric wire is released can be set, so that the electric wiring is prevented from interfering with other configurations. It is possible to facilitate the placement of electrical wiring.

<Technical thought to make electrical wiring suitable for guide route>
A game machine D1 comprising: configuration means for configuring a guide path capable of guiding an electrical wiring, wherein the configuration means is configured to be capable of suitably arranging the electrical wiring in the guide path.

  BACKGROUND In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a temporary fixing portion for temporarily holding an electric wire on a displacement member (see, for example, JP 2012-157474 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, although the electrical wiring can be made to move along the displacement member, when the electrical wiring is constituted by a plurality of electric wires, it does not refer to the arrangement of the electric wires. There is a problem that there is room for improvement when applied to actual usage conditions.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the configuration means constituting the guide path of the electrical wiring is configured to be capable of suitably arranging the electrical wiring, it is possible to keep the quality of the electrical wiring high.

  In addition, the aspect which arrange | positions an electrical wiring suitably is not limited at all. For example, by bundling a plurality of electric wires in advance at a position before the narrowing of the guiding route, or by separating a plurality of electric wires in advance at a position before the opening of the guiding route becomes thin, electric wiring from the guiding route It may be a mode of reducing the load given to the above, or a mode of fixing the electrical wiring to the guide path in a predetermined section. In the former case, disconnection of the electrical wiring can be easily prevented, and in the latter case, it is possible to easily cope with the disconnection by making it easy to identify the location where the electrical wiring is disconnected.

  In the gaming machine D1, the guiding path includes a reducing portion in which a predetermined direction width is locally reduced, and the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that a cross-sectional shape is constituted by a plurality of types.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, by providing the reduction portion as a location where the load to which the electrical wiring is applied is relatively large, it is easy to predict the disconnection location when the electrical wiring breaks. Become. Thereby, the time required for the maintenance of the electrical wiring can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine D2, the electrical wiring disposed in the reduction section is configured to have a reduced width in a first direction view, and the configuration means is configured to guide the electrical wiring to the reduction section at the location where the electrical wiring is guided. A game machine D3 comprising a wire adjustment unit configured to be capable of reducing the width of the wire in the first direction view.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, by shortening the width of the electrical wiring in the first direction view, it is possible to avoid the structure of other prizes being restricted to the electrical wiring it can. Furthermore, if the width of the electrical wiring is excessively shortened, an excessive load is applied to the electrical wiring, and the electrical wiring may be crushed or broken prematurely, whereas the electrical wiring is guided to the reduction portion. By adjusting the state of the electrical wiring by the wiring adjustment means before it is done, the load given to the electrical wiring can be reduced. This can reduce the frequency of maintenance.

  In the gaming machine D3, the wiring adjusting means includes a curved surface on which the center of the radius of curvature is disposed on the electric wiring side, and the circumferential direction of the curved surface is configured along the direction in which the electric wires are arranged. A game machine D4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the loads given to the plurality of electric wires can be equalized. That is, compared with the case where a plane faces a plurality of electric wires, among the electric wires arranged side by side, regardless of whether it is the electric wire closer to the center side or the electric wire closer to the outer side, the load given to the electric wire is equalized. can do.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the wiring adjustment means includes a recessed portion which is recessed wider than the width of the electric wire constituting the electric wiring.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3 or D4, since the limit of the extent to which the electric wire is released can be set, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from interfering with other configurations. The arrangement of electrical wiring can be facilitated.

  A game machine D6 comprising a fixing member (design member) for fixing the electric wiring in any one of the game machines D1 to D5.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the wear of the electric wiring can be prevented by preventing the internal displacement of the electric wiring, so that the separate fixing of the binding band etc. It is possible to prevent the disconnection of the electrical wiring without any tool.

  In addition, the aspect of fixation is not limited at all. For example, the configuration means and the electrical wiring may be fixed by a liquid member such as glue, or a tape coated with a member having an adhesive action (a tape having an adhesive action, etc.) is attached to the component and the electrical wire It may be in an aspect, or it may be an aspect in which displacement of the electric wiring is prevented by a load generated when the electric wiring is sandwiched between the component means and the fixing member.

  In the gaming machine D6, an opening is formed in the fixed member, and the electric wiring can be reached through the opening.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D6, the arrangement of the electrical wiring can be adjusted through the opening from the opposite side of the electrical wiring to the fixing member. It is possible to avoid placing the wiring in the wrong position easily, and to prevent the electric wiring from being damaged during work.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the guide path includes a receiving unit configured to receive the electric wiring, and an entering unit configured to be capable of entering the receiving unit, and the electric wiring includes: A game machine D8 supported by the entry section.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the advantageous effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the possibility of the electrical wiring being pinched between the recessed portion and the entry portion can be reduced.

<Technical thought to improve presentation effects by using blind spots>
A game comprising: a predetermined area configured to be visible in a first direction view, and predetermined means configured to allow passage of a game ball, and predetermined means for changing a view aspect of the predetermined area in the first direction view Machine E1.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with an overhanging arrangement portion which is disposed to be projected to the front side of the gaming board (see, for example, JP-A-2006-333887). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the overhanging arrangement portion blocks the player's line of sight above the middle in the vertical direction of the gaming board, so effects in the portion hidden by the overhanging portion There is a problem that the effect tends to be low.

  That is, by drawing patterns and figures in the limited area of the game board, it becomes possible to create the individuality of each game machine, but in places where there is a possibility of being hidden by the overhang arrangement part If it is clear that the player is unlikely to recognize the pattern or figure even if the pattern or figure is drawn, it is avoided to draw the pattern or figure in a portion which may be hidden in the overhang arrangement portion. As a result, the area where patterns and figures can be drawn on the game board is further narrowed. Therefore, the degree of freedom of decoration of the game board is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the predetermined area is adopted as a passage for light or the like instead of a place for drawing a figure or a pattern, and the predetermined mode is a place where the visual aspect can be changed by the predetermined means. As a result of effectively using the area and increasing the degree of freedom of decoration of the game board, the effect of the game board can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a gaming board configured to allow game balls to flow down on the front side, and the gaming board includes an opening formed so as to overlap at least a part of the predetermined area. Game machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiated from the back side position of the gaming board to the gaming board from the back side to the front side through the opening partially overlapping the predetermined area Can be irradiated. Therefore, since the vicinity of the predetermined area where a dark impression tends to be made can be brightly illuminated with light, the rendering effect in the vicinity of the predetermined area can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, a game machine E3 characterized in that the predetermined means constitutes a rolling surface of a gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the flow of the gaming ball can be easily determined by the light and the gaming ball being superimposed and visually recognized. As a result, as compared to the case where the player notices that the game ball has not reached the vicinity of the winning opening for the first time to notice the abnormal launch, the shooting abnormality of the gaming ball can be seen by looking at the downstream side of the flow path For example, it is possible to make it easy to notice that the launch of the gaming ball is stalled due to a failure of the launch device or a ball jam. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid problems in the game (for example, so-called "punk in a single-type / two-type mixer").

  In the gaming machine E3, the opening is configured so as to be visible linearly along the predetermined means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, it is possible to effectively use the predetermined area as much as possible and to prevent the opening from being formed to a portion not hidden by the predetermined means.

  In the gaming machine E3 or E4, the predetermined means is a first predetermined means for rolling when the game ball flows down the left side of the game area, and the game is for rolling when the game ball flows down the right side of the game area A game machine E5 comprising: second predetermined means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3 or E4, the mode of firing the ball by controlling which of the first predetermined means or the second predetermined means the light is viewed through Can be notified.

  One of the game machines E1 to E5, comprising: a displacement member which is displaced to the front side through the predetermined area.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, it is possible to configure so that the player can easily identify the change in the predetermined area.

<Technical thought to notify gaming efficiency by decelerating gaming balls>
The game ball is configured to be able to abut, and includes a flow-down means that configures a flow-down path of the game ball in contact, and the flow-down means includes a protruding portion protruding toward the game area side Game machine F1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which the inner rail member constitutes the rolling surface of the gaming ball which has fallen from the general winning opening on the left side of the gaming area (see, for example, JP2011-229686A) . The game ball that has reached the inner rail member on the left side of the game area is a game ball that has been determined to flow down to the out port (become the ball to die), and some of the game balls are the game being played This is one of the data effective for achieving the winning efficiency in the game area of the machine. Therefore, by giving attention to the left side of the game area, it is possible to give the player predetermined benefits. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to keep the gaming ball stagnant because the flow of the gaming ball is too smooth, and it is difficult to pay attention to the gaming ball flowing down the left side of the gaming area. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the flow-down means includes the projecting portion, it is possible to decelerate the game ball flowing down the flow-down means. Thereby, the game ball can be easily held on the left side of the game area, and the left side of the game area can be focused.

  In the gaming machine F1, the projecting portion is provided on the downstream side of a landing area where the gaming ball abuts when the landing ball lands.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1, it is possible to prevent the bouncing of the gaming ball from becoming unstable after the gaming ball lands on the flowing-down means, and the gaming ball flows-down means It is possible to prevent the protrusion from being damaged by the impact when it collides with the vehicle.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the projecting portion approaches the game ball from the downstream side of the flow-down means as compared to the repulsive force generated in the direction of pushing back the gaming ball approaching from the upstream side of the flow-down means A game machine F3 characterized in that the repulsive force to be generated in the direction of pushing back is larger.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from stopping on the flow-down means, and the gaming ball goes beyond the protruding part to the flow-down means It can prevent you from rising along.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion and a second projecting portion provided on the upstream side of the flow-down means with respect to the first projecting portion. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that a projecting aspect of the first projecting portion is different from a projecting aspect of the second projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the degree of stagnation (deceleration) of the gaming ball in the first projecting portion and the stagnation of the gaming ball in the second projecting portion ( Deceleration) can be made different.

  The form of protrusion is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the protruding portion may be used, the protruding length or the protruding width may be used, or the protruding interval when a plurality of protruding portions are formed may be used.

  For example, in the case where the projection length is adopted as the projection aspect, if the projection length of the second projection portion is made longer than the projection length of the first projection portion, it flows down on the flow-down means. The game ball can be made hard to set. As a result, since it is possible to prevent the game balls from being solidified (in aggregate) and flowing into the out port, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the out port.

  Conversely, when the projection length of the second projection is made shorter than the projection length of the first projection, the gaming ball flowing down on the flow-down means can be easily solidified. As a result, when the game ball reaches the flow-down means with high frequency, the game ball can be easily clumped, so it is easy to attract the attention of the player who wants to obtain information on the winning efficiency. .

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the flow-down means includes a diffusion portion in which a diffusion shape is formed at the front end.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the front end of the flow-down means can be surface-lit.

  In the gaming machine F5, the thickness of the protruding portion is equal to the thickness of the flow-down means, and the diffusion portion is a protrusion protruding in the opposite direction from the front end of the protruding portion. A game machine F6 characterized by comprising a section.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, since the thickness of the protruding portion and the thickness of the flow-down means are equal, the molding accuracy in resin-forming the flow-down means This can be improved as compared to when the thickness changes. In addition, since the diffusion portion includes the projecting portion, a large area in which light is diffused can be secured on the front side of the projecting portion, so that the attention to the projecting portion can be improved.

  In any one of game machines F1 to F6, the game ball is provided above the projecting portion and has a ball entry port configured to be capable of entering a ball, and the aspect visually recognized through the projecting portion is the front. A game machine F7 characterized by being changeable according to the presence or absence of the game ball entering the ball entry hole.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, entering the ball into the ball entrance can be grasped by visually recognizing the flow-down means. This makes it possible to increase the attention to the flow down means.

  The gaming machine F7 includes reflecting means disposed between the projecting portion and the ball entrance, and the reflecting means receives at least a portion of the light reflected from the projecting portion. A game machine F8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to enter the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of playing the gaming machine F7, it is possible to project the ball entrance to the projecting part, so for the player focusing on the projecting part, entering the ball into the ball entrance It can be made to grasp the existence.

  In addition, the game ball which rolls the upper part of the flow-down means (the game ball which actually exists) and the game ball which enters the ball entrance for the player who pays attention to the projecting part, the action of the reflection means Since it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game balls (the reflected game balls) which can be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make the player feel as if many game balls are gathered at one place.

<One side of the flow path configured by connecting the members in a row by one member>
In a gaming machine provided with a component arranged opposite to a flow-down area configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a first component constituting one side of the first flow-down area, and the other side of the first flow-down area A game machine G1 comprising: a second component member for forming a second component and a third component member, wherein the third component member constitutes a part of a second flow-down region constituted by the first component member.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a long flow path is configured by arranging a plurality of pairs of flow path constituting members forming the flow path continuously (for example, JP-A-2015-159997) No.2). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of members constituting the flow path is large, and there is a problem that parts management becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the second component and the first component constituting the flow passage can be combined with the third component and the member constituting the flow passage to constitute the flow passage. Since the number of members can be reduced, parts management can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine G1, one of the constituent members constituting at least a part of the one side of the flow-down area includes an arrangement portion, and the other configuration which constitutes at least a part of the other side of the flow-down area A gaming machine G2 characterized in that the member includes a positioning portion that is positioned by coming into contact with the disposition portion.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, since the alignment of the constituent members can be performed by the abutment of the arrangement part and the positioning part, many fastening and fixing parts are required for alignment. It can be unnecessary to arrange.

  A game machine G3 characterized by comprising adjustment means for making it possible to adjust the arrangement of the second component or the third component with respect to the first component in the game machine G1 or G2.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second component or the third component can be easily arranged with respect to the first component.

  The adjusting means may be integrally formed on the second component or the third component, or may be configured as an individual member different from any of the first component, the second component, or the third component. It is good.

  In the gaming machine G3, a gaming machine G4 characterized in that the adjusting means is configured to be displaceable independently of any of the first component, the second component or the third component.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the degree of freedom of adjustment of the adjusting means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G4, a gaming machine G5 characterized in that the adjusting means is configured not to affect the shape of the flow-down area even if the arrangement changes.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, only the first component, the second component, and the third component may be disposed while confirming that the ball can flow down Since the arrangement of the adjusting means can be set independently of the flowability of the ball, the number of assembling steps can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G5, the first component includes a positioning recessed portion recessed from the downstream area side, and the adjusting unit is disposed in the positioning recessed portion to form the first configuration. A game machine G6 characterized in that a surface on the flow-down area side is formed on the surface on which the one side surface of the member is formed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, while configuring one side of the flow-down area by the adjustment means, avoiding that the shape of the flow-down area changes due to the different arrangement of the adjustment means it can.

  In the gaming machine G6, the adjustment means is characterized in that a corner on the side disposed opposite to the flow-down direction of the gaming ball is chamfered.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the surface of the adjustment means disposed on the side opposite to the flow-down direction of the game ball is chamfered. Even in the case of projecting to the side of the flow-down area rather than the side surface, it is possible to configure a collision point with the game ball with a surface. Thus, the possibility of damage to the adjusting means due to a collision with the gaming ball can be reduced, and the flow resistance of the gaming ball can be reduced.

  A game machine G8 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines G1 to G7, the second component and the third component are connected.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G7, it is possible to reduce the displacement of the arrangement of the third component with respect to the second component. The portion connected to the third component can be smoothly configured.

<Technical thought to arrange the spring near the center of the displacement member>
A gaming machine comprising a displacing means configured to be displaceable, a guiding means configured to guide the displacement of the displacing means, and a biasing means configured to bias the displacing means, the front side of the biasing means A shielding means disposed on the side and arranged to block at least a part of the line of sight to the biasing means, the biasing means extending between the displacement means and the guiding means along a predetermined direction A game machine H1 characterized by being disposed in

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable part configured to be displaceable, a guide rail for guiding the displacement of the movable part, and an urging means for generating a biasing force for assisting the displacement of the movable part. There is a gaming machine provided with the biasing means disposed on the opposite side (rear side) of the movable part with the guide rail interposed therebetween (see, for example, JP-A-2016-054856). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of efficiently generating the biasing force because the back and forth interval between the center of gravity position of the movable combination and the position where the biasing force is generated is long. The

  On the other hand, if the arrangement of the biasing means is moved to the front side in order to bring the biasing means closer to the center of gravity of the movable combination, the biasing means will be seen by the player, which may reduce the rendering effect. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the urging force can be efficiently generated by bringing the urging means close to the displacement means, and the shielding means prevents the urging means from being visually recognized by the player. can do.

  In the gaming machine H1, the shielding means is disposed on the rear side of the displacing means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1, it is possible to prevent the shielding means from hiding the displacing means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the shielding means is configured to be able to enter inward of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, it is possible to prevent the figure or pattern drawn outside the displacement means from being obscured by the shielding means.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the shielding means includes correcting means configured to be abuttable by the displacement means being disposed at a predetermined position, and the correcting means abuts on the displacement means. Thus, the attitude of the displacing means can be corrected to the initial attitude side.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the shielding is performed when the displacing means is disposed at the predetermined position, even when an unexpected change in posture occurs in the displacing means Since the correction means of the means abuts on the displacement means to correct the posture change, the posture change can be corrected each time the displacement means is disposed at the predetermined position. This makes it possible to prevent the displacement means from changing its attitude beyond the allowable limit and colliding with parts other than the correction means of the shielding means.

  In the gaming machine H4, a gaming machine H5 characterized in that the correction means includes a support stable portion that stabilizes the support of the biasing means.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the correcting means can also be used as a means for preventing the dropping of the energizing means. As a result, the number of members can be reduced and the functions can be integrated.

  A game machine H6 characterized in that any one of the game machines H1 to H5 is provided with a second shielding means for shielding the shielding means against a specific direction (looking up).

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, even when the displacing means is disposed at a position where the back side of the displacing means can be visually recognized in the specific direction, The second shielding means can prevent the shielding means from being visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the biasing means from being seen in a specific direction view.

  In the gaming machine H6, the second shielding means is disposed on the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, it is possible to facilitate the appropriate concealment of the shielding means and the urging means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacing means.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F8, G1 to G8 and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A game machine K1 to be Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of game machines A1 to A7, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F8, G1 to G8 and H1 to H7, the game machine is a pachinko game machine A gaming machine K2 to be. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F8, G1 to G8 and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A game machine K3 characterized in that it is a fusion. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 60 base board (game board)
60a window (opening)
63 General prize winning opening (part of ball entry)
86, 2086 Center frame (part of predetermined means)
86b1 Left boundary wall (first predetermined means)
86b2 Right boundary wall (second predetermined means)
150 Left side production unit (part of flow down means)
153 Counterplate (part of the reflection means)
155 Projections (part of projection)
156 first ridge (second projection)
157 Second projection (first projection)
158 Diffusion part 161 Base member (part of the first component)
161e recessed part (positioning recessed part)
162 First channel member (part of second component)
163 Second channel member (part of third component)
165 Adjustment member (part of the adjustment means)
410 Support means (part of guide means, second wiring support means)
413 Uneven hole (2nd open part)
460 Wiring auxiliary means (part of component means, part of receiving part)
463a Functional curved surface (part of arrangement part)
510 Means of fixing (part of component)
511 U-shaped metal plate (part of support means, first support means)
514 Left and right fixed lid (part of fixed member)
514b Extended frame part (part of reduced part)
514e Hole for jig (opening)
516 Guide member (part of wiring support means, first wiring support means, part of wiring adjustment means)
517 Uneven hole (part of opening, first opening)
517a Fastening part (part of restriction means, overhang part)
517b Fan-shaped adjustment part (part of restriction means, recessed part, part of wiring adjustment means)
519 Lower extension part (pillar part, part of approach part)
522 Right fixing bush (part of support means, second support means, part of wiring adjustment means)
537 Protruding fastening part (part of the limiting means)
541 Drive motor (drive means)
547 Detection sensor (part of detection means, detection device)
560 Rotor (part of the rotating means)
577 Detected part (protruding part)
711 Metal slide rail (part of guiding means)
718, 5718 Shape for fixing (predetermined part)
720, 3720 displacement base member (part of intermediate means, part of displacement means)
731 Drive motor (drive means)
740 Transmission means 744a Curved part (part of sudden stop means)
751 Flanged cylindrical member (support stable portion)
760 Supporting means (part of displacement means)
763 Driven displacement member (base member)
764 electric decoration substrate (substrate)
765b Route part (guidance part)
788 Lower shielding member (second shielding means)
2086e Displacement part (part of displacement member)
SP1 coil spring (part of biasing means)
SC1, SC3 Spring cover (part of shielding means)
DK1, DK2, DK3 electrical wiring SC3c left and right extension (part of correction method)

Claims (3)

A game machine comprising: displacement means configured to be displaceable; guiding means configured to be able to guide displacement of the displacement means; and biasing means for biasing the displacement means.
A shielding means disposed on the front side of the biasing means and disposed so as to block at least a part of a line of sight to the biasing means;
A game machine characterized in that the biasing means is disposed between the displacement means and the guiding means along a predetermined direction.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the shielding means is disposed on the back side of the displacement means.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the shielding means is configured to be able to enter inward of the displacement means.

Images